Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Medium-Voltage AC-Converter
SINAMICS GM150
Start
Introduction 1
Safety Instructions 2
Commissioning (software) 3
Medium-Voltage AC Converters
Commissioning (hardware) 4
SINAMICS GM150
Commissioning Manual for Parameter assignment /
5
addressing
SINAMICS GM150, Software
Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Functions 6
Commissioning Manual
Alarm, error and system
messages 7
Appendix A
1/2008
A5E00923869K
Start
Start
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
WARNING
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only
in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage,
positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Table of contents
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.1 Purpose of this document ..............................................................................................................9
1.2 Performing a receiving inspection..................................................................................................9
2 Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Observing the five safety rules.....................................................................................................11
2.2 ESD-sensitive components..........................................................................................................11
2.3 Safety concept .............................................................................................................................13
2.3.1 Monitoring functions.....................................................................................................................13
2.3.2 Insulation monitoring....................................................................................................................13
2.3.3 Undervoltage tripping...................................................................................................................14
2.3.4 High-speed grounding switch.......................................................................................................15
2.3.5 Emergency shutdown (trip line) ...................................................................................................16
2.3.6 Controlled stop, EMERGENCY OFF category 1 (option L60) .....................................................16
3 Commissioning (software) ....................................................................................................................... 19
3.1 Commissioning tools....................................................................................................................19
3.2 Software installation.....................................................................................................................19
3.2.1 System requirements for installing STARTER.............................................................................19
3.2.2 Installing STARTER .....................................................................................................................20
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface..........................................................20
3.3.1 Hardware components required for PROFIBUS communication ................................................20
3.3.2 PROFIBUS interface, diagnostics LEDs, address switches ........................................................20
3.3.3 Connecting the PROFIBUS cables ..............................................................................................23
3.3.4 Setting the PROFIBUS address switches....................................................................................24
3.3.5 Requirements for communication via PROFIBUS .......................................................................25
3.4 Data backup on the CompactFlash card and firmware update ...................................................26
3.4.1 Data backup .................................................................................................................................26
3.4.2 Upgrading firmware version automatically...................................................................................27
3.5 Switching on the auxiliary power supply ......................................................................................27
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool ...........................................................................................28
3.6.1 Working with the STARTER project wizard .................................................................................28
3.6.2 Options for creating a project.......................................................................................................31
3.6.3 First commissioning ONLINE with the project wizard ..................................................................32
3.6.3.1 Assembling a new project online .................................................................................................32
3.6.3.2 Downloading the drive project to the PG .....................................................................................38
3.6.3.3 Configuring a drive.......................................................................................................................39
3.6.3.4 Downloading the drive project to the target system and saving ..................................................55
3.6.3.5 Entering additional important parameters....................................................................................57
3.6.4 First commissioning ONLINE without the project wizard .............................................................60
3.6.4.1 Assembling a new project online without using the project wizard..............................................60
3.6.4.2 Configuring your drive project ......................................................................................................68
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 3
Start
Table of contents
3.6.4.3 Downloading the drive project to the target system and saving ................................................. 83
3.6.4.4 Entering additional important parameters (V2.5) ........................................................................ 87
3.6.5 First commissioning OFFLINE with the project wizard ............................................................... 91
3.6.5.1 Creating a new project ................................................................................................................ 91
3.6.5.2 Configure the drive unit ............................................................................................................... 97
3.6.5.3 Start drive project and download to target device..................................................................... 116
3.6.5.4 Entering additional important parameters ................................................................................. 121
3.6.6 Concluding parameter comparison ........................................................................................... 124
3.6.7 Saving a project ........................................................................................................................ 128
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel...................................................................................... 132
3.7.1 General information about the AOP30 operator panel ............................................................. 132
3.7.1.1 The AOP30 operator panel ....................................................................................................... 132
3.7.1.2 The keys of the AOP30 ............................................................................................................. 134
3.7.1.3 Basic operation of the AOP 30.................................................................................................. 135
3.7.2 First commissioning and basic parameter assignment with the AOP30 operator panel .......... 138
3.7.2.1 Initial commissioning with the AOP 30...................................................................................... 138
3.7.2.2 Basic parameterization with the AOP 30 .................................................................................. 139
3.7.3 Parameterization errors............................................................................................................. 143
3.7.4 Saving the parameters permanently ......................................................................................... 143
3.7.5 Individual configuration of the AOP30 operator panel .............................................................. 143
3.7.5.1 Define operation screen ............................................................................................................ 143
3.7.5.2 Control settings ......................................................................................................................... 148
3.7.5.3 Inhibit functions ......................................................................................................................... 151
3.7.6 Menu description and setting options ....................................................................................... 154
3.7.6.1 Introduction (AOP menus)......................................................................................................... 154
3.7.6.2 Operation screen....................................................................................................................... 154
3.7.6.3 Parameterization ....................................................................................................................... 156
3.7.6.4 Fault/alarm memory .................................................................................................................. 159
3.7.6.5 Commissioning / service drive commissioning ......................................................................... 161
3.7.6.6 Commissioning / service device commissioning....................................................................... 163
3.7.6.7 Commissioning / Service - AOP settings .................................................................................. 166
3.7.6.8 Commissioning/Service - AOP diagnostics............................................................................... 171
3.7.6.9 Language .................................................................................................................................. 174
4 Commissioning (hardware) .................................................................................................................... 175
4.1 Overview of parameter macro interconnections in table format ............................................... 175
4.2 Conduct signal check ................................................................................................................ 175
4.3 Conducting hardware tests ....................................................................................................... 176
4.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 176
4.3.2 Required hardware tests ........................................................................................................... 177
4.3.2.1 Circuit-breaker test.................................................................................................................... 177
4.3.2.2 Test of the make-proof grounding switch and the pre-charging ............................................... 178
4.3.2.3 Testing the door interlocking and the door limit switch ............................................................. 180
4.3.2.4 Test of the pre-charging and of the line switch ......................................................................... 180
4.3.2.5 Testing the EMERGENCY STOP button .................................................................................. 181
4.3.3 Recommended hardware tests ................................................................................................. 182
4.3.3.1 Test of the main fans................................................................................................................. 182
4.3.3.2 Test of the redundant main fan ................................................................................................. 183
4.3.3.3 Test of the auxiliary fans ........................................................................................................... 183
4.4 Checking the signal wiring ........................................................................................................ 184
4.4.1 Potential concept....................................................................................................................... 184
5 Parameter assignment / addressing ...................................................................................................... 185
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
4 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Table of contents
5.1 Parameters.................................................................................................................................185
5.2 BICO technology: Interconnecting signals.................................................................................188
5.2.1 Binectors and Connectors..........................................................................................................188
5.2.2 Interconnecting signals using BICO technology ........................................................................189
5.2.3 Additional explanations of BICO technology..............................................................................191
5.3 Data sets ....................................................................................................................................192
5.4 Changing over units ...................................................................................................................197
5.5 Reference parameters/normalizations.......................................................................................199
6 Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 201
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)............................................................201
6.1.1 Basic settings .............................................................................................................................201
6.1.2 Motor data identification.............................................................................................................204
6.1.3 Advanced settings......................................................................................................................205
6.1.3.1 Field weakening starting point ...................................................................................................205
6.1.3.2 Notes on Operation with no Tacho-Generator...........................................................................206
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors .................................206
6.2.1 Safety information ......................................................................................................................206
6.2.2 Basic settings .............................................................................................................................207
6.2.3 Motor data identification.............................................................................................................210
6.2.4 Pole position identification .........................................................................................................211
6.2.5 Advanced settings......................................................................................................................213
6.2.5.1 Field weakening starting point ...................................................................................................213
6.2.5.2 Notes on Operation with no Tacho-Generator...........................................................................214
6.3 Note regarding the commissioning of separately excited synchronous motors ........................214
6.4 Drive Functions ..........................................................................................................................214
6.4.1 Setpoint channel ........................................................................................................................214
6.4.1.1 Description .................................................................................................................................214
6.4.1.2 Jog .............................................................................................................................................216
6.4.1.3 Fixed speed setpoints ................................................................................................................220
6.4.1.4 Motorized potentiometer ............................................................................................................221
6.4.1.5 Main/supplementary setpoint and setpoint modification............................................................222
6.4.1.6 Direction of rotation limiting and direction of rotation changeover.............................................224
6.4.1.7 Suppression bandwidths and setpoint limits..............................................................................225
6.4.1.8 Ramp function generator ...........................................................................................................226
6.4.2 Speed controller .........................................................................................................................231
6.4.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................231
6.4.2.2 Speed controller adaptation .......................................................................................................233
6.4.2.3 Speed controller pre-control and reference model ....................................................................235
6.4.2.4 Droop function............................................................................................................................238
6.4.2.5 Torque control ............................................................................................................................240
6.4.2.6 Torque limiting............................................................................................................................242
6.4.2.7 Current setpoint filter..................................................................................................................244
6.4.2.8 Current controller .......................................................................................................................245
6.4.3 Vdc control .................................................................................................................................246
6.4.4 Flying restart ..............................................................................................................................249
6.4.5 Automatic restart........................................................................................................................250
6.4.6 Bypass function..........................................................................................................................256
6.4.7 Staging function .........................................................................................................................261
6.4.7.1 Description of the staging function.............................................................................................261
6.4.7.2 Staging without a staging command..........................................................................................262
6.4.7.3 Staging with a staging command ...............................................................................................263
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 5
Start
Table of contents
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
6 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Table of contents
A.3.3 Overview of standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV................320
A.3.4 Overview of standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV................328
A.3.5 Overview of standard interconnections for the parameter macro PM001540 on B_INFMV......329
A.3.6 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001555 for option G66 .................331
A.3.7 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001557 Analog O PSA for
options K21 and K20..................................................................................................................332
A.3.8 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001558 Analog O PSA for
options K22 and K20..................................................................................................................334
A.3.9 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001571 for Emergency Button
1 option ......................................................................................................................................336
A.3.10 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001580 Lamps and StartStop
Button.........................................................................................................................................336
A.3.11 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001582 for option L27-L29
Bypass1 .....................................................................................................................................338
A.3.12 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001583 for option L53 UPS .........341
A.3.13 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001584 for option L55
Standstill Heating .......................................................................................................................342
A.3.14 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001585 for options N20, N21
Capacitor Tripping device Circuit Breaker .................................................................................342
A.3.15 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001587 for option Motor
temperature sensors ..................................................................................................................343
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 345
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 353
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 7
Start
Start
Introduction 1
1.1 Purpose of this document
This documentation facilitates the safe handling of the SINAMICS GM150 medium-voltage
converter and contains comprehensive information on the commissioning and operating
utilization phases and the tools available for it.
● This Commissioning Manual is part of the electronic documentation.
● This Commissioning Manual is valid for:
– Software version SINAMICS V2.5
– STARTER version 4.1
Documentation scope
In the interests of clarity, this documentation does not contain all the detailed information for
all product types and cannot take into account every possible aspect of installation,
operation, or maintenance.
Target group
This documentation is geared toward machine manufacturers, commissioning personnel and
service personnel who put the SINAMICS GM150 medium-voltage converter into operation
and operate it.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 9
Start
Introduction
1.2 Performing a receiving inspection
Note
Perform each step of the receiving inspection in order to identify major faults or defects
immediately.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
10 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Safety Instructions 2
2.1 Observing the five safety rules
For your personal safety and in order to prevent material damage it is essential that you
follow the safety instructions given below and all safety-related instructions in your product
documentation. In particular pay attention to the safety-related instructions on the product
itself and always read the section headed "Safety Instructions" in each document.
DANGER
Danger due to high voltages
High voltages cause death or serious injury if the safety instructions are not observed or if
the equipment is handled incorrectly.
Potentially fatal voltages occur when this equipment is in operation which can remain
present even after the converter is switched off.
Ensure that only qualified and trained personnel carry out work on the equipment.
Follow the five rules at all times and during each stage of the work.
The five safety rules:
1. Disconnect the system.
2. Protect against reconnection.
3. Make sure that the equipment is de-energized.
4. Ground and short-circuit.
5. Cover or enclose adjacent components that are still live
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These modules can be easily destroyed by improper handling.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 11
Start
Safety Instructions
2.2 ESD-sensitive components
CAUTION
Use conductive packaging material
Electronic modules must be stored, transported and dispatched in conductive
packaging.
Electronic modules which are not correctly stored, transported or dispatched can be
damaged.
Pack electronic modules in appropriate conductive packaging (e.g. foam rubber or
aluminum foil).
The necessary ESD protective measures for electrostatically sensitive devices are illustrated
once again in the following drawings:
d d d
b b
e e
f f f f f
c a c a c a
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Sitting
(2) Standing
(3) Standing/sitting
ESD protective measures
a = conductive floor
b = ESD table
c = ESD footwear
d = ESD coat
e = ESD wrist strap
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
12 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
Insulation monitoring
The SINAMICS GM150 converter is operated ground-free via an IT system. This means that
the converter can continue to operate if a ground fault occurs.
NOTICE
A second ground fault causes the converter to fail.
For safety reasons, it is necessary to detect such ground faults, in order to eliminate the risk
of electric shock on the converter. For this reason, the SINAMICS GM150 converter is
equipped with an A-ISOMETER insulation monitor (type IRDH275BM), which continuously
monitors the condition of the converter, including the motor.
Only one insulation monitoring device can be connected to each live connected IT system.
The insulation monitor automatically adjusts monitoring in line with the line discharge
capacitance.
Before carrying out any insulation or voltage testing on the power system, the voltage
monitor's instrument cables must be disconnected for the duration of testing.
The A-ISOMETER Type IRDH275BM is connected between the ungrounded supply and the
equipotential bonding conductor (PE).
Self-test
The A-ISOMETER IRDH275B automatically runs a self-test routine whenever the insulation
resistance of the mains supply > 20 MΏ or every 24 hours if an output relay has been
preselected for system fault signaling.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 13
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
Terminal monitoring
The connections to mains and ground (PE) are monitored continuously. If the cables are
interrupted or not connected, or if their resistance is high, this is indicated on the LCD.
In this case, please check the terminal conductors immediately, as the insulation resistance
is not being measured properly.
The insulation resistance can be > 20 MΏ in new or small IT systems. An alarm would also
be output in this case. In this case, terminal monitoring must be deactivated in Setup2.
The insulation monitor monitors the insulation resistance of the converter with respect to two
limit values:
Limit value 1: Insulating resistor < 500 kOhms = Signal 1 (alarm)
Limit value 2: Insulating resistor < 100 kOhms = Signal 2 (fault)
The messages are wired as follows on the terminal strip TM 15, and output as messages to
the AOP30 and the starter.
Signal Terminal
Message 1 .HC-A11-X522:3
Message 2 .HC-A11-X522:4
For more detailed information on how the A-ISOMETER IRDH275B functions and
instructions on how it is operated, see "Supplementary instructions (options, third-party
suppliers)".
WARNING
This function cannot ensure that the drive stops immediately, nor can it ensure that residual
voltages do not still exist at the output terminals and within the unit.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
14 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
Description
The short-circuiter is triggered if an over-voltage occurs due to a serious fault and it cannot
be brought under control by opening the circuit-breaker and unlocking the pulse block of the
machine.
When the short-circuiter thyristors are triggered, the circuit-breaker is always deactivated.
Once the thyristors have been triggered, an acknowledgement signal is output to the closed-
loop control system. Fiber-optic conductors are used to control gating of the thyristors and
the acknowledgement signals.
The short-circuiter is triggered by the Power Stack Adapter.
WARNING
It takes up to six minutes for the voltages to reach a safe level once the high voltage and
auxiliary voltage have been switched off.
If the short-circuiter is defective, this can significantly increase the discharge time.
Always observe the five safety rules in "Safety information/personnel protection" and in the
converter documentation.
The response voltage depends on the rated output voltage of the converter:
Rated output voltage [kV] 2.3 3.3 4.16 6.0 6.6 7.2
Response voltage [kVdc] 2.2 3.125 4,.4 5.7 6.25 6.8
(for each half of DC link)
The resistors absorb the energy stored in the DC link and limit the current. In the event of
false tripping, the torque surge for the machine, which is still rotating, is limited by the
resistors.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 15
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
Description
2Q2II
&8
&RQWDFWRUFRQWURO
FLUFXLWEUHDNHUV
'5,9(&OL4
IRU
'5,9(&OL4
)LEHURSWLFFDEOH 2II
36$ 36$
The overview diagram shows how central components are networked. The DRIVE-CLiQ
connection between the control unit and the power stack adapter is considered secure
because communication on the DRIVE-CLiQ cable is monitored cyclically.
With regard to contactor control for the circuit breaker, a two-channel bypass to the open
circuits is provided for safety reasons. Refer to the overview diagram for circuit breaker
control in the appendix. This ensures that the circuit breaker opens whenever a fault occurs
within the system, that is, system faults in the control unit or power stack adapter cause the
circuit breaker to trip. A bypass to the circuit breaker is also provided via a fiber-optic ring if
faults occur in other inverter systems.
The following time-coded signals are transmitted via the fiber-optic ring:
● Pulse inhibit
● Circuit breaker OPEN
● Crowbar CLOSED
● Arc-through of all IGCTs (only with GM150 IGCT)
NOTICE
The drive is stopped during controlled deceleration without braking modules with only a
very low % braking torque. Depending on the load machine, the ramp-down procedure may
take a long time.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
16 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 17
Start
Start
Commissioning (software) 3
3.1 Commissioning tools
You have two options for commissioning the converter:
1. STARTER commissioning tool
– We recommend you use the STARTER commissioning tool and Project Wizard for
easy commissioning.
– In this case, you must install the STARTER software, which you can find on the
supplied CD. For information on how to do so, refer to the section entitled Software
installation (Page 19).
– You must also set up a PROFIBUS interface in order to perform the commissioning
with STARTER. For information on how to do so, refer to the section entitled
" Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface (Page 20) ".
2. The AOP operator panel
– If you have no PC or programming device (PG), you can perform the commissioning
using the AOP operator panel. In this case, continue with the section entitled
" Commissioning via the operator panel (Page 132) ".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 19
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
Software requirements:
● Windows 2000 SP3 or SP4, or
● Windows XP Professional SP1 or SP2 or
● Windows Server 2003 SP1
● Internet Explorer V6.0.
Introduction
The PROFIBUS connection, diagnostics LEDs, and the PROFIBUS address switch are
located on the Control Unit CU320.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
20 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
5'<
'3
237
ཱ
02'
5'<
'3,
237
02'
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 21
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
CAUTION
No CAN cables may be connected to the X126 interface. If CAN cables are connected, the
CU320 and other CAN bus nodes could be seriously damaged.
Note
A teleservice adapter can be connected to the PROFIBUS interface (X126) for remote
diagnostics purposes.
The power supply for the teleservice terminals 2 and 7 may have a max. load of 150 mA.
Diagnostics LED ②
The meaning is explained in the table below.
PROFIBUS selector ③
The PROFIBUS address switch is located under the cover.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
22 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
Description
The figure below shows suitable PROFIBUS connectors with/without a programming
device/PC connector.
352),%86FRQQHFWRUV 352),%86FRQQHFWRUV
ZLWKRXW3*3&FRQQHFWLRQ ZLWKSURJUDPPLQJGHYLFH3&
(6%$;$ FRQQHFWLRQ
(6%%;$
✔ Connect the cables to the PROFIBUS connectors, as these connectors contain the
necessary bus terminating resistors.
✔ Connect the cable shield over a wide area on both sides.
)LUVWEXVQRGH /DVWEXVQRGH
RQ RQ RQ
RII RII RII
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ %XVWHUPLQDWLRQ
)URPSUHYLRXV 7RQH[W
EXVQRGH EXVQRGH
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 23
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
✔ Switch the bus terminating resistor on or off depending on its position in the bus,
otherwise the data will not be transmitted properly.
Description
The PROFIBUS address of the Control Unit CU320 must be set for PROFIBUS
communication.
You have two options for setting the PROFIBUS address:
● DIP switch on the Control Unit CU320
● Parameter p0918 (default setting)
Switch Significance
S1 20 = 1
S2 21 = 2
S3 22 = 4
S4 23 = 8
S5 24 = 16
S6 25 = 32
S7 26 = 64
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
24 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
6 6
21
2))
21
2))
6 6
Example:
Significance
Note
The PROFIBUS address switches have a default setting of 0 or 127 (set via parameter
p0918).
Note
The set PROFIBUS address is saved by means of the "Copy RAM to ROM" function.
Description
The PROFIBUS master must always send a 1 in the eleventh bit (bit 10) of the first control
word (control by PLC). The process data (PZD) will not otherwise be processed further
internally.
It is not sufficient to interconnect parameter p854 permanently with a 1.
This also applies to slave-to-slave communication between multiple slaves (converter with
DC master as an excitation device...). The eleventh bit (bit 10) must be preset to 1 in the first
control word from the master to the converter. This also applies when no other master
control commands are in use and slaves are communicating by direct slave-to-slave data
exchange only.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 25
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.4 Data backup on the CompactFlash card and firmware update
Data backup
CAUTION
The CompactFlash card must only be inserted or removed when the power is off.
Otherwise there is a risk of data loss or damage to the card,
which would prevent commissioning of the drive.
Only remove or insert the CompactFlash card when the power is switched off.
✔ Check that a CompactFlash card has been inserted into the CPU.
✔ Remove the CompactFlash card from the CPU and back up the data stored on the
card.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
26 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.5 Switching on the auxiliary power supply
Introduction
When new converter firmware is installed, e.g. by installing a new CompactFlash card, the
firmware for the components is upgraded automatically after switching on.
Description
Automatic firmware upgrade is indicated by the <RDY> LED on the CU flashing
orange/green, and by an LED on the component concerned also flashing.
If the <RDY> LED on the CU flashes rapidly in orange, this indicates that the update is
complete.
CAUTION
During the firmware upgrade, the firmware of the individual components is updated.
Interruptions of the firmware upgrade may cause damage to the components.
Therefore, never interrupt the firmware upgrade process.
Description
✔ Switch on the 230 V and 24 V auxiliary power supply. When doing so, refer to the
circuit diagram in the "Circuit diagram" section in the Operating Instructions.
Note
System power-up
It can take several minutes for the system to power up.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 27
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
28 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 29
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Click the "Display wizard during start" check box to remove the check mark. The
project wizard then no longer appears the next time the STARTER program is called
up.
Online Help
STARTER features a detailed online Help function. The online Help is automatically
displayed when you start up STARTER.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
30 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ On the "Workbench" tab, click the "Display first steps at the start" check box to remove
the check mark. Now, the STARTER Help wizard will no longer appear the next time
the program is called up.
You can reactivate the online help at any time by selecting menu command "First steps" in
the "Help" menu.
Note
The STARTER dialog screens are preassigned with defined values.
Carefully check the preset values in the dialog screens and adapt them to your requirements
as needed.
By carefully and diligently entering the configuration data, you can avoid any deviations
between the project data and the device data that are displayed in online mode.
ONLINE MODE
In ONLINE mode, there is a communications link to the drive that enables data exchange.
● All parameters are directly read from the drive.
● Parameter changes are written to the drive and become immediately effective there.
● Parameter sets can be generated by upread.
● Parameter sets can be written by download.
● Process data can be read and written to (setpoints, actual values, control commands,
etc.).
For further information, refer to the STARTER Help.
In ONLINE mode, you can perform the first commissioning with or without the project wizard.
● First commissioning ONLINE with the project wizard.
– The drive device, the options, and the infeed are automatically detected by STARTER
and entered into the corresponding dialog screens.
● First commissioning ONLINE without the project wizard (Page 60).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 31
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
– You must enter the drive device, the options, and the infeed into the corresponding
dialog screens.
OFFLINE Mode
In OFFLINE mode there is no communication link to the drive. Data cannot be exchanged.
All parameters are read from the parameter sets of the project rather than from the drive.
● Each drive and each drive component (DO (Control Unit, Motor Module, Terminal
Module) of the SINAMICS drive system have a parameter set.
● Parameter changes are written to the parameter set.
● Parameter sets cannot be uploaded directly from the device.
● Parameter sets cannot be downloaded directly to the device.
● Process data cannot be editing (by defining a setpoint and control commands or
acquiring an actual value).
You perform "First commissioning OFFLINE with the project wizard" in OFFLINE mode.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
32 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 33
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
The online connection to the drive unit can only be established via PROFIBUS,
✔ Click on button "Change and test..." to set the interface according to your device
configuration.
Note
To parameterize the interface, you must install the appropriate interface card (e.g.: CP5512.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
34 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box and make the desired settings in
the appropriate drop down list "Timeout","Transmission rate", "Highest station address"
and "Profile".
NOTICE
You must select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box if no other master (PC, S7,
etc.) is available on the bus.
✔ Click on button "OK" to confirm the settings and to return to the project wizard.
✔ Click on button "Change and test..." and, in the next window, on button "Diagnostics" to
check the interface.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 35
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Click on button "OK" to confirm the settings and to return to the project wizard.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
36 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Click on button "Finish" to finish creating a new project for the drive unit.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 37
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
38 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 39
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
40 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 41
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
42 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Select the standard that applies to your motor from the "Standard" drop down list:
• IEC motor [50 Hz/kW]: Line frequency 50 Hz, motor data input in kW
• NEMA [60 Hz/hp]: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data entry in hp.
✔ In the connection voltage input field, enter the value of the DC-link voltage for your
device. Normally, the supply voltage of the Motor Module is calculated as 1.414 x
supply voltage of the infeed.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
For example, to determine the required supply voltage (DC link voltage for the drive/vector object):
10,465 V = 1.414 x device supply voltage (7,400 V)
NOTICE
The value for the supply voltage should not be changed at a later point.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 43
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Enter a name of your choice for the motor in the "Motor name" input field.
✔ Select the motor for your drive unit from the "Motor type" drop down list. If you do not
select a motor type, you will not be able to exit this screen.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
44 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Enter the motor data as per the motor type specifications on the rating plate of the
motor in the "Value" input field.
The number of pole pairs is calculated automatically from p0310/p0311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in error message 7950 when commissioning is
completed. The suspected incorrect parameter is shown in the appendage.
The error could be due to:
• p0307 >= 1.7321 * p0304 * p0305 *p308
• No motor selected (p0300=0)
• Slip = 0 or too low
For the induction motor, it is very important to enter the correct rated motor speed
P0311 to assess the motor data.
✔ If necessary, activate the check box "Use or change available optional data?".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 45
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ If necessary, activate the check box "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit
diagram data?". Enter the required data:
Rating plate data:
• p304, p305, p307, p310, p311
Optional data:
• p0322 = maximum motor speed
– If p322 is entered, you cannot select a technological maximum speed in p1082
that exceeds p0322. Likewise, the current limit in p0640 cannot exceed p0323, if
p0323 > 0. These parameters are primarily designed to protect the motor.
• p0323 = maximum motor current
• p0341 = motor moment of inertia
– Parameters p0341 and p0342 are required for acceleration precontrol and for
encoderless operation. If these parameters are left blank, then estimated values
are derived from p0341 on the basis of the rating plate data.
• p0342 = moment of inertia ratio
• p0352 = cable resistance
– It is particularly important to enter line parameters p0352 and p0353 if there are
long supply cables between the converter and the motor.
• p0353 = cable inductance
ECD data:
• p0350 = motor stator resistance, cold
• p0354 = motor rotor resistance, cold
• p0356 = motor stator leakage inductance
• p0358 = motor rotor leakage inductance
• p0360 = motor magnetizing inductance
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If
the values for a delta connection are the only data available, all 5 parameters must be
divided by a factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically. Correct
entry of the ECD data has a beneficial influence on the control characteristics. In
particular, the speed and torque can be estimated far more accurately during
encoderless operation. If the main inductance p0360 is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current p0320 can be entered instead. This also allows for better
estimation of the parameters. The resulting magnetizing current, calculated on the
basis of the data entered, is displayed in r0331.
NOTICE
You should only select the "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data?"
check box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available.
If you do not enter all the required data, you will not be able to exit the screen.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
46 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
If you enter the equivalent circuit diagram data manually, you must activate radio button
"Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data" as the equivalent circuit
diagram data you enter will otherwise be overwritten.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 47
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In "Calculation of the motor/controller data", select the appropriate default settings for
your device configuration. Activate the appropriate radio button as required
• Radio button "No calculation"
– No controller / limitation parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be
calculated. All data are available and have been entered.
• Radio button "Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data"
– The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered; the controller and limitation
parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be calculated from the ECD
and rating plate data entered
• Radio button "Complete calculation with equivalent circuit diagram data"
– The equivalent circuit diagram data and controller / limitation parameters will be
calculated only from the rating plate data.
Note
The menu "Configuration - Encoder" is displayed only if you have selected option K50.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
48 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Under "Which encoder would you like to use", select the check box corresponding to
the encoder that you want to configure.
If you select more than one encoder at the same time, a separate tab will be set up for
each encoder.
✔ Enter a name for the encoder in the "Encoder name" input field.
If an SMC30 is connected but no encoder is present, select "No encoder" from the drop
down list.
✔ Select the interface for evaluating the encoder from the drop down list "Encoder
evaluation".
✔ Select the appropriate default setting for the encoder evaluation. Activate the
corresponding radio button:
• Radio button "Select standard encoder from list"
• Radio button "Enter data".
✔ Select the corresponding encoder type from the list or enter the data.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 49
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-29 STARTER - Default settings for setpoints and command sources
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
50 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
By default, only "CDS 0" is assigned as a default setting of the command sources.
NOTICE
Make sure that the selected default settings correspond to the actual system configuration.
Once you have selected a pre-assignment macro, you cannot change it later via the
"< Back" button!
If you have made an incorrect entry, you have to delete the entire drive unit from the project
navigator and insert a new one.
✔ Check your default selections carefully and then click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 51
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ If PROFIBUS is being used to control the drive then you can enter the appropriate
telegram type here. If the programming device or the PC with STARTER is the only
PROFIBUS partner, then you need to select "Free telegram configuration with BICO"
(factory setting) from the drop down list.
✔ Click "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
52 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In input fields
• "Current limit",
• "Minimum speed",
• "Maximum speed",
• "Ramp-up time",
• "Ramp-down time",
• "Ramp-down time with OFF3"
, enter the values of the most important parameters.
Note
STARTER displays tooltips if you move your cursor over the required field without clicking it.
If you have activated the calculation function (complete calculation with/without equivalent
circuit diagram data), the motor current limit and maximum speed are overwritten when the
parameters are loaded to the target device unless you have disabled them in the disable list.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 53
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
A summary of the data is displayed in this menu. You can save this data to the clipboard for
subsequent use in a text editor.
✔ Click on button "Copy text to clipboard" to transfer your drive unit data summary
displayed in the window for later use in a word-processing program.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
54 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
3.6.3.4 Downloading the drive project to the target system and saving
Note
If there is more than one drive listed in the project navigator, then clicking on "Download to
target system" loads the data to all devices.
Clicking "Download" only loads the data for the device that is selected.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 55
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Click on button "OK" to save the project data on the programming device/PC.
Alternatively, you may also save the data via the menu.
NOTICE
The project has now been loaded to the drive unit.
The data is currently only stored in the temporary memory of the drive unit and not on the
CompactFlash card.
Save your project data on the CompactFlash card of your drive unit as described under
"Saving project data in the target system" to avoid losing data during a power outage.
Note
STARTER guides you through the commissioning process and when performing complex
drive system operations.
If you come up against any system conditions that are beyond your control while in online
mode, we recommend that you delete the drive project from the project navigator and
carefully create a new project with STARTER using the appropriate configuration data for
your application.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
56 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Place the medium-voltage switch in TEST position before commissioning, or switch the
medium-voltage power supply off to ensure that the medium-voltage switch can be
isolated from the power supply.
✔ Check the default values and adjust them to match the switch data if necessary.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 57
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In the project navigator of the STARTER user interface under vector, double-click
"Configuration".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
58 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In the selection list of the command and setpoint sources, select the source, e.g.,
terminal block, fixed setpoint, etc.
✔ Click on button "Execute". (The command and setpoint sources reset to "No
selection").
✔ Click on button "Close".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 59
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
3.6.4.1 Assembling a new project online without using the project wizard
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
60 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Click on button "Yes" to confirm and automatically select a drive unit for the project.
✔ Select the check box for the drive you wish to select.
✔ Click on button "Accept" to add the selected drive to the project.
The following message is displayed
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 61
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
Topology not recognized
If the topology is not fully recognized various values will be missing, for example:
• "Infeed"
• "All TM modules"
• Drive "VECTORMV"
This is confirmed by viewing the topology:
✔ Click the Setpoint button in the topology view to configure the values.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
62 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
NOTICE
The system will go offline without transmitting any data and will then go back online again.
A comparison is carried out between the drive and the previously created project. The
differences are displayed.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 63
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
64 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Double-click "Topology" in the directory tree to view the topology that has
been recognized.
✔ Click on button "Update topology" to display the current data values.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 65
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Click on button "Diagnostic overview" to view the status of the drive unit components.
✔ Click on button "Load to PG output" to load these settings.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
66 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Load to PG output
Topology output
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 67
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Messages
Conditions for carrying out basic drive unit configuration with the drive navigator
Before starting basic drive configuration with the drive navigator you have to:
● Go offline
– Load the data to the programming device when going offline
● Save the STARTER project
– Save the data from RAM to ROM when going offline
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
68 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In the project navigator, click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you would like to
configure.
The plus sign changes to a minus sign.
The options for configuring the drive unit appear as a directory tree under the selected
drive unit.
✔ Double-click on "Drive navigator".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 69
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
70 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 71
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
72 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Select the standard that applies to your motor from the "Standard" drop down list:
• IEC motor [50 Hz/kW]: Line frequency 50 Hz, motor data input in kW
• NEMA [60 Hz/hp]: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data entry in hp.
✔ In the connection voltage input field, enter the value of the DC-link voltage for your
device. Normally, the supply voltage of the Motor Module is calculated as 1.414 x
supply voltage of the infeed.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
For example, to determine the required supply voltage (DC link voltage for the drive/vector object):
10,465 V = 1.414 x device supply voltage (7,400 V)
NOTICE
The value for the supply voltage should not be changed at a later point.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 73
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Enter a name of your choice for the motor in the "Motor name" input field.
✔ Select the motor for your drive unit from the "Motor type" drop down list. If you do not
select a motor type, you will not be able to exit this screen.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
74 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Enter the motor data as per the motor type specifications on the rating plate of the
motor in the "Value" input field.
The number of pole pairs is calculated automatically from p0310/p0311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in error message 7950 when commissioning is
completed. The suspected incorrect parameter is shown in the appendage.
The error could be due to:
• p0307 >= 1.7321 * p0304 * p0305 *p308
• No motor selected (p0300=0)
• Slip = 0 or too low
For the induction motor, it is very important to enter the correct rated motor speed
P0311 to assess the motor data.
✔ If necessary, activate the check box "Use or change available optional data?".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 75
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ If necessary, activate the check box "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit
diagram data?". Enter the required data:
Rating plate data:
• p304, p305, p307, p310, p311
Optional data:
• p0322 = maximum motor speed
– If p322 is entered, you cannot select a technological maximum speed in p1082
that exceeds p0322. Likewise, the current limit in p0640 cannot exceed p0323, if
p0323 > 0. These parameters are primarily designed to protect the motor.
• p0323 = maximum motor current
• p0341 = motor moment of inertia
– Parameters p0341 and p0342 are required for acceleration precontrol and for
encoderless operation. If these parameters are left blank, then estimated values
are derived from p0341 on the basis of the rating plate data.
• p0342 = moment of inertia ratio
• p0352 = cable resistance
– It is particularly important to enter line parameters p0352 and p0353 if there are
long supply cables between the converter and the motor.
• p0353 = cable inductance
ECD data:
• p0350 = motor stator resistance, cold
• p0354 = motor rotor resistance, cold
• p0356 = motor stator leakage inductance
• p0358 = motor rotor leakage inductance
• p0360 = motor magnetizing inductance
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If
the values for a delta connection are the only data available, all 5 parameters must be
divided by a factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically. Correct
entry of the ECD data has a beneficial influence on the control characteristics. In
particular, the speed and torque can be estimated far more accurately during
encoderless operation. If the main inductance p0360 is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current p0320 can be entered instead. This also allows for better
estimation of the parameters. The resulting magnetizing current, calculated on the
basis of the data entered, is displayed in r0331.
NOTICE
You should only select the "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data?"
check box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available.
If you do not enter all the required data, you will not be able to exit the screen.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
76 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
If you enter the equivalent circuit diagram data manually, you must activate radio button
"Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data" as the equivalent circuit
diagram data you enter will otherwise be overwritten.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 77
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In "Calculation of the motor/controller data", select the appropriate default settings for
your device configuration. Activate the appropriate radio button as required
• Radio button "No calculation"
– No controller / limitation parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be
calculated. All data are available and have been entered.
• Radio button "Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data"
– The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered; the controller and limitation
parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be calculated from the ECD
and rating plate data entered
• Radio button "Complete calculation with equivalent circuit diagram data"
– The equivalent circuit diagram data and controller / limitation parameters will be
calculated only from the rating plate data.
Note
The menu "Configuration - Encoder" is displayed only if you have selected option K50.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
78 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Under "Which encoder would you like to use", select the check box corresponding to
the encoder that you want to configure.
If you select more than one encoder at the same time, a separate tab will be set up for
each encoder.
✔ Enter a name for the encoder in the "Encoder name" input field.
If an SMC30 is connected but no encoder is present, select "No encoder" from the drop
down list.
✔ Select the interface for evaluating the encoder from the drop down list "Encoder
evaluation".
✔ Select the appropriate default setting for the encoder evaluation. Activate the
corresponding radio button:
• Radio button "Select standard encoder from list"
• Radio button "Enter data".
✔ Select the corresponding encoder type from the list or enter the data.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 79
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ If PROFIBUS is being used to control the drive then you can enter the appropriate
telegram type here. If the programming device or the PC with STARTER is the only
PROFIBUS partner, then you need to select "Free telegram configuration with BICO"
(factory setting) from the drop down list.
✔ Click "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
80 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In input fields
• "Current limit",
• "Minimum speed",
• "Maximum speed",
• "Ramp-up time",
• "Ramp-down time",
• "Ramp-down time with OFF3"
, enter the values of the most important parameters.
Note
STARTER displays tooltips if you move your cursor over the required field without clicking it.
If you have activated the calculation function (complete calculation with/without equivalent
circuit diagram data), the motor current limit and maximum speed are overwritten when the
parameters are loaded to the target device unless you have disabled them in the disable list.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 81
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
A summary of the data is displayed in this menu. You can save this data to the clipboard for
subsequent use in a text editor.
✔ Click on button "Copy text to clipboard" to transfer your drive unit data summary
displayed in the window for later use in a word-processing program.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
82 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
3.6.4.3 Downloading the drive project to the target system and saving
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 83
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Click on button "OK" to save the project data on the programming device/PC.
Alternatively, you may also save the data via the menu.
A confirmation prompt is displayed, confirming that the data have been successfully
transferred to the target device.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
84 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
NOTICE
The Online/offline comparison window may be displayed again (for example, if the status
reports that quick commissioning of the infeed was not completed).
Close the window.
✔ Select command "Copy RAM to ROM" in the "Target system" menu to save
the drive data to the CompactFlash card or
✔ Click on icon "Copy RAM to ROM" to save the data to the CompactFlash
card.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 85
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Select your project in the project navigator of the Starter user interface. With
the right mouse button, click on "Infeed_1" and select the expert list in the
shortcut menu.
Conclude quick commissioning by setting parameter P3900=3.
Note
Updating the parameter settings
Key parameters are updated when quick commissioning is finished.
To conclude the configuration of the new STARTER project with the new settings:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
86 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
STARTER guides you through the commissioning process and when performing complex
drive system operations.
If you come up against any system conditions that are beyond your control while in online
mode, we recommend that you delete the drive project from the project navigator and
carefully create a new project with STARTER using the appropriate configuration data for
your application.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 87
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Place the medium-voltage switch in TEST position before commissioning, or switch the
medium-voltage power supply off to ensure that the medium-voltage switch can be
isolated from the power supply.
✔ Check the default values and adjust them to match the switch data if necessary.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
88 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In the project navigator of the STARTER user interface under vector, double-click
"Configuration".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 89
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In the selection list of the command and setpoint sources, select the source, e.g.,
terminal block, fixed setpoint, etc.
✔ Click on button "Execute". (The command and setpoint sources reset to "No
selection").
✔ Click on button "Close".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
90 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 91
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
92 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
The online connection to the drive unit can only be established via PROFIBUS.
✔ Click on button "Change and test..." to set the interface according to your device
configuration.
Note
To parameterize the interface, you must install the appropriate interface card (e.g.: CP5512.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 93
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box and make the desired settings in
the appropriate drop down list "Timeout","Transmission rate", "Highest station address"
and "Profile".
NOTICE
You must select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box if no other master (PC, S7,
etc.) is available on the bus.
Note
Projects can be created and PROFIBUS addresses can be assigned for the drive objects
even if no PROFIBUS interface has been installed on the PC.
To prevent bus addresses from being assigned more than once, only the bus addresses
available in the project are proposed.
✔ Click on button "OK" to confirm the settings and to return to the project wizard.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
94 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Click on button "Continue >" to insert a drive unit in the project wizard.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 95
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
The selected drive unit is displayed in the preview window of the project wizard.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
96 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Click on button "Finish" to finish creating a new project for the drive unit.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 97
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In the project navigator, click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you would like to
configure.
The plus sign changes to a minus sign.
The options for configuring the drive unit appear as a directory tree under the selected
drive unit.
✔ Double-click on "Configure drive unit".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
98 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Select the correct voltage from the "Motor voltage" drop down list.
✔ Select the correct cooling method from the "Cooling method" drop down list.
Note
With this step, you preselect the cabinet devices that are displayed in the "Drive units
selection" box.
You do not yet define the supply voltage at this point.
✔ In the list under Drive unit selection, select the drive unit based on the ordering no.
(The ordering no. can be found on the rating plate of your converter).
✔ Select the required "Default macro".
This default macro can be used for specific wiring configurations. Further information is
given in the "Parameters for signal interconnection" section of the Appendix.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 99
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select options
✔ In the "Options selection" box, select the options that belong to your drive unit. To do
this, click on the check box of the relevant options, as per the rating plate.
The motor reactor value must be entered in p0353.
Note
In the starter, only those options that are software-relevant are listed.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
100 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
NOTICE
• If you plan to use a sinus filter (option Y15) it is imperative that you select the check box
for this option.
• Compare your options carefully to the options specified on the rating plate.
– The project wizard establishes internal interconnections based on the selected
options. It is not possible therefore to change the selected options later via the "
< Back " button.
– If you have made an incorrect entry, you have to delete the entire drive unit from the
project navigator and add a new one.
✔ Check the options you have selected carefully and then click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 101
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Enter the supply voltage in the "Device connection voltage" input field.
When you enter the device supply voltage, always enter the total input terminal voltage.
For instance, a 24-pulse 7.2 kV converter corresponds to a supply voltage of 4 x 1,850
V = 7,400 V. If this is not taken into consideration when entering the device supply
voltage, the default control parameters will be incorrect.
✔ Select the frequency from the "Rated supply frequency" drop down list.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
102 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 103
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Select the standard that applies to your motor from the "Standard" drop down list:
• IEC motor [50 Hz/kW]: Line frequency 50 Hz, motor data input in kW
• NEMA [60 Hz/hp]: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data entry in hp.
✔ In the connection voltage input field, enter the value of the DC-link voltage for your
device. Normally, the supply voltage of the Motor Module is calculated as 1.414 x
supply voltage of the infeed.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
For example, to determine the required supply voltage (DC link voltage for the drive/vector object):
10,465 V = 1.414 x device supply voltage (7,400 V)
NOTICE
The value for the supply voltage should not be changed at a later point.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
104 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Enter a name of your choice for the motor in the "Motor name" input field.
✔ Select the motor for your drive unit from the "Motor type" drop down list. If you do not
select a motor type, you will not be able to exit this screen.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 105
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Enter the motor data as per the motor type specifications on the rating plate of the
motor in the "Value" input field.
The number of pole pairs is calculated automatically from p0310/p0311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in error message 7950 when commissioning is
completed. The suspected incorrect parameter is shown in the appendage.
The error could be due to:
• p0307 >= 1.7321 * p0304 * p0305 *p308
• No motor selected (p0300=0)
• Slip = 0 or too low
For the induction motor, it is very important to enter the correct rated motor speed
P0311 to assess the motor data.
✔ If necessary, activate the check box "Use or change available optional data?".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
106 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ If necessary, activate the check box "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit
diagram data?". Enter the required data:
Rating plate data:
• p304, p305, p307, p310, p311
Optional data:
• p0322 = maximum motor speed
– If p322 is entered, you cannot select a technological maximum speed in p1082
that exceeds p0322. Likewise, the current limit in p0640 cannot exceed p0323, if
p0323 > 0. These parameters are primarily designed to protect the motor.
• p0323 = maximum motor current
• p0341 = motor moment of inertia
– Parameters p0341 and p0342 are required for acceleration precontrol and for
encoderless operation. If these parameters are left blank, then estimated values
are derived from p0341 on the basis of the rating plate data.
• p0342 = moment of inertia ratio
• p0352 = cable resistance
– It is particularly important to enter line parameters p0352 and p0353 if there are
long supply cables between the converter and the motor.
• p0353 = cable inductance
ECD data:
• p0350 = motor stator resistance, cold
• p0354 = motor rotor resistance, cold
• p0356 = motor stator leakage inductance
• p0358 = motor rotor leakage inductance
• p0360 = motor magnetizing inductance
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If
the values for a delta connection are the only data available, all 5 parameters must be
divided by a factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically. Correct
entry of the ECD data has a beneficial influence on the control characteristics. In
particular, the speed and torque can be estimated far more accurately during
encoderless operation. If the main inductance p0360 is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current p0320 can be entered instead. This also allows for better
estimation of the parameters. The resulting magnetizing current, calculated on the
basis of the data entered, is displayed in r0331.
NOTICE
You should only select the "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data?"
check box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available.
If you do not enter all the required data, you will not be able to exit the screen.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 107
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
If you enter the equivalent circuit diagram data manually, you must activate radio button
"Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data" as the equivalent circuit
diagram data you enter will otherwise be overwritten.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
108 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In "Calculation of the motor/controller data", select the appropriate default settings for
your device configuration. Activate the appropriate radio button as required
• Radio button "No calculation"
– No controller / limitation parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be
calculated. All data are available and have been entered.
• Radio button "Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data"
– The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered; the controller and limitation
parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be calculated from the ECD
and rating plate data entered
• Radio button "Complete calculation with equivalent circuit diagram data"
– The equivalent circuit diagram data and controller / limitation parameters will be
calculated only from the rating plate data.
Note
The menu "Configuration - Encoder" is displayed only if you have selected option K50.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 109
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Under "Which encoder would you like to use", select the check box corresponding to
the encoder that you want to configure.
If you select more than one encoder at the same time, a separate tab will be set up for
each encoder.
✔ Enter a name for the encoder in the "Encoder name" input field.
If an SMC30 is connected but no encoder is present, select "No encoder" from the drop
down list.
✔ Select the interface for evaluating the encoder from the drop down list "Encoder
evaluation".
✔ Select the appropriate default setting for the encoder evaluation. Activate the
corresponding radio button:
• Radio button "Select standard encoder from list"
• Radio button "Enter data".
✔ Select the corresponding encoder type from the list or enter the data.
✔ Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
110 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-96 STARTER - Default settings for setpoints and command sources
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 111
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
By default, only "CDS 0" is assigned as a default setting of the command sources.
NOTICE
Make sure that the selected default settings correspond to the actual system configuration.
Once you have selected a pre-assignment macro, you cannot change it later via the
"< Back" button!
If you have made an incorrect entry, you have to delete the entire drive unit from the project
navigator and insert a new one.
✔ Check your default selections carefully and then click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
112 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ If PROFIBUS is being used to control the drive then you can enter the appropriate
telegram type here. If the programming device or the PC with STARTER is the only
PROFIBUS partner, then you need to select "Free telegram configuration with BICO"
(factory setting) from the drop down list.
✔ Click "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 113
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In input fields
• "Current limit",
• "Minimum speed",
• "Maximum speed",
• "Ramp-up time",
• "Ramp-down time",
• "Ramp-down time with OFF3"
, enter the values of the most important parameters.
Note
STARTER displays tooltips if you move your cursor over the required field without clicking it.
If you have activated the calculation function (complete calculation with/without equivalent
circuit diagram data), the motor current limit and maximum speed are overwritten when the
parameters are loaded to the target device unless you have disabled them in the disable list.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
114 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
A summary of the data is displayed in this menu. You can save this data to the clipboard for
subsequent use in a text editor.
✔ Click on button "Copy text to clipboard" to transfer your drive unit data summary
displayed in the window for later use in a word-processing program.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 115
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
116 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Next, transfer the configuration data of your project to the drive unit.
To transfer the STARTER project that was created offline to the drive unit:
1. Establish a connection to the target system
2. Download the project to the target system
3. Save the project in the target system
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 117
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
If there is more than one drive listed in the project navigator, then clicking on "Download to
target system" loads the data to all devices.
Clicking "Download" only loads the data for the device that is selected.
✔ Click on button "OK" to save the project data on the programming device/PC.
Alternatively, you may also save the data via the menu.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
118 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
NOTICE
The project has now been loaded to the drive unit.
The data is currently only stored in the temporary memory of the drive unit and not on the
CompactFlash card.
Save your project data on the CompactFlash card of your drive unit as described under
"Saving project data in the target system" to avoid losing data during a power outage.
After the data have been loaded to the target device, various calculations are performed on
the CU.
These calculations mean that the online and offline parameters are no longer identical.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 119
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
120 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
STARTER guides you through the commissioning process and when performing complex
drive system operations.
[ID 5121.00]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 121
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Place the medium-voltage switch in TEST position before commissioning, or switch the
medium-voltage power supply off to ensure that the medium-voltage switch can be
isolated from the power supply.
✔ Check the default values and adjust them to match the switch data if necessary.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
122 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In the project navigator of the STARTER user interface under vector, double-click
"Configuration".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 123
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ In the selection list of the command and setpoint sources, select the source, e.g.,
terminal block, fixed setpoint, etc.
✔ Click on button "Execute". (The command and setpoint sources reset to "No
selection").
✔ Click on button "Close".
✔ Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
Vector
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
124 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ You can choose whether to compare the online data with the project that is currently
loaded or with the default parameters in the "Objects to compare" drop-down list.
✔ Click on button "Display filters" to select the columns you want to include in the
comparison.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 125
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
126 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
The parameters determined to be different vary constantly because they are always
changing.
You can either save the results as a log file or copy them to the clipboard to edit them in
another application.
✔ Select radio button "Save as user-defined list of parameters" to save the script file.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 127
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ You can print out the comparion results. To do this, click on button "Print comparison
results".
Backup options
There are two ways of backing up projects to prevent data loss.
To be able to use the best method of restoring your data in any given situation, it is advisable
to back up your data using both methods.
Archiving a project
This backup method saves your project as a zip file, making it easy to use it with another
drive, for example.
✔ Go offline.
✔ Select the "Archive..." command in the "Project" menu.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
128 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Select the project that you want to archive (project test27 in the example shown).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 129
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
✔ Select the folder where you want to archive the project (starter_projects in the example
shown).
The project is then saved as an archive and can be uncompressed and restored as and
when needed.
✔ Go offline.
✔ Select the "Save and export" command in the "Project" menu.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
130 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
All data in the target directory selected will be deleted before the XML export. Make sure that
no subdirectories or files in the target directory are open on other applications (e.g.
displaying the directory in Windows Explorer). If they are, close the application and restart
the XML export.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 131
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Click on the link highlighted in blue to obtain more detailed information about the project that
has been exported. This requires a program capable of displaying XML files (such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer).
Description
You can use the advanced operator panel (AOP30) for commissioning, operating, and
diagnosing the converter.
The AOP30 communicates with the SINAMICS drive via a serial RS232 interface with PPI
protocol. The interface is a point-to-point connection. During communication, the AOP30 is
the master and the connected drive is the slave.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
132 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
2SHUDWLQJVWDWXV 'LVSOD\
/('V
21JUHHQ
$ODUP\HOORZ
)DXOWUHG
IXQFWLRQNH\V
0DVWHUFRQWURO
0HQXNH\ VHOHFWLRQ
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
.H\ERDUGLQWHUORFN FKDQJHRYHU
,QFUHDVHGHFUHDVH
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 133
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Switches between remote and local mode. In local mode, the LED
/2&$/
5(027(
illuminates.
More detailed information is available in Chapter Control Settings.
On/off button.
The "On" key is always in effect in local mode, if no inhibit function is
activated.
The "Off" key is only active in local mode and acts as "OFF1" in the
default setting. More detailed information is available in Chapter Control
Settings.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
134 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
) ) Function keys.
These keys have different functions depending on the menu. The
respective function appears in plain text above the key.
See also
Control settings (Page 148)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 135
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
$NWXHOOH6W¸UXQJHQ
+DXSWPHQ¾
$NWXHOOH:DUQXQJHQ
$OWH6W¸UXQJHQ
+LOIH
$OWH:DUQXQJHQ
6HO3DU
*UXQGLQEHWULHEQDKPH
%HWULHEVPDVNH
.RPSOHWWLQEHWULHEQDKPH
¦QGHUQ
0RWRULGHQWLILNDWLRQ
'LDJ /¾IWHUODXI]HLW]XU¾FNVHW]HQ
%HUHLW
*HU¦WHNRQILJXUDWLRQ
)HVWOHJXQJ$QWULHEVW\S
(LQ]HOQHV'2 $QWULHEVEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
'DWHQEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
$OOH'2 3DUDPHWHUUHVHW
3DUDPHWULHUXQJ
'DWHQVDW]DXVZDKO
6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
3HUPDQHQWH 'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ
3DUDPHWHU¾EHUQDKPH
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
'DWXP8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ
6W¸UVSHLFKHU
:DUQXQJVVSHLFKHU (UZHLWHUWH(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQ]XU¾FNVHW]HQ
$QWULHEV
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
6RIWZDUH'DWHQEDQNYHUVLRQ
*HU¦WH
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
,QEHWULHEQDKPH %DWWHULH]XVWDQG
6HUYLFH
$23 .RPPXQLNDWLRQ
(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
7DVWDWXUWHVW
$23
/('7HVW
'LDJQRVH
)ODVK)6IRUPDWLHUHQ
6SUDFKH 3HUVLVWHQWH'DWHQEDQNO¸VFKHQ
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
136 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
581
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
$/$50 %HWULHEVPDVNH7\S
+LOIH
Ⴃ Ⴍ ]XU¾FN ႱႧ¦QGHUQ
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
Figure 3-127 Function keys of the AOP 30
Changing a parameter
Observe the functions assigned to the function keys (1), which can differ from menu to menu
(e.g., function key F5 is assigned to the function OK or ◀ ▶ Change)
✔ Using the function keys ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ select the parameter that you want to change.
✔ In order to change the selected parameter you must activate the parameter according
to the menu.
Do this by pressing the OK function key.
✔ Use either the numeric keypad or the function keys
▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to modify the selected parameter.
✔ You must confirm the change according to the menu.
Do this by pressing the OK function key.
✔ Click the Back, function key to scroll back in the main menu, or
click the Menu function key to switch directly to the main menu.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 137
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
3.7.2 First commissioning and basic parameter assignment with the AOP30 operator
panel
Introduction
During the initial commissioning of the converter, the first operating step is to set the
language. Then carry out the basic parameterization. The input of parameters is done in
seven or eight menus (depending on whether you want to enter equivalent circuit diagram
parameters).
Only when all of the parameters necessary for the initial commissioning have been set, no
more initial commissioning will be performed. Regardless of whether the parameterization
was carried out at the AOP or using the STARTER.
You can skip the menu-driven initial commissioning using the Menu key. The main menu
appears. By selecting the menu item Commissioning/Service - Drive Commissioning -
Complete Commissioning you can start the initial commissioning. When Complete
commissioning is selected, the parameterization of the infeed is omitted. The parameters
listed in section Basic Parameterization must be reparameterized during the Complete
Commissioning“ in the parameter list of the B_Infeed.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
138 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Introduction
The parameters that can be entered during the basic parameterization are listed in the
following. Depending on the configuration of the drive, not all of the parameters have to have
assigned values.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 139
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
motor parameter
For safe operation, some important parameters must be entered.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
140 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Note
If you select the line Back in this menu, the Motor standard/Motor type menu is called up.
Encoder commissioning
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 141
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Basic Commissioning
Message overview
In this menu, faults and alarms of the individual drive objects are displayed.
Acknowledging faults:
✔ If no faults are present, press the Tools key and select Back.
✔ Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key.
The Operation screen menu is called up.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
142 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Note
Depending on the configuration of your drive, additional settings are still necessary.
Description
If an error occurs when reading or writing parameters, this is indicated by a message in the
display of the AOP.
Description
When parameters are changed, the new values are first saved in volatile memory (RAM). If
the changed values cannot be permanent saved, they are lost when the converter is
switched off. If changed values are not yet saved to the CompactFlash card, an "S" flashes
in the top right of the display
✔ When confirming a parameter setting, press the OK key for more than 1 second. The
system displays a prompt asking you whether the setting is to be saved in the
EEPROM.
✔ Select Yes if you want to save the changed values. All of the changes that are not yet
permanently saved are saved in EEPROM. The save is confirmed by a note, the
flashing "S" extinguishes or,
✔ Select No if you do not want to save the changed values. The "S" continues to flash.
Description
Depending on the type of drive, an operation screen with 10 different display parameters is
the default.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 143
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
You can define the display of the operation screen to suit yourself in 5 types of display
(screen 2). The following types of display are available:
● Values
● Bar
● mixed
Values type display:
● 2 digital values
● 10 values
The order of the entries in this screen determines the order of the operating variables
(parameters) displayed in the operation screen.
Bar type display:
● 3 bars
Mixed type display:
● 8 values/1 bars
● 4 values/2 bars
Order of the display: First come the parameters that are to be displayed digitally, then the
parameters that are to be displayed as bars.
✔ Press the Change function key. The display changes to the Define operation screen
menu.
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
0DVNH DNWLY ႱႧ
%HWULHEVPDVNH7\S
0DVNH7\S :HUWH%DONHQ ႱႧ
+LOIH
Ⴍ ]XU¾FN ႱႧ¦QGHUQ
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
144 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
✔ Using the ▲ or ▼ function keys, select the entry Screen2 and then, using the Change
function key, select the active setting.
✔ Using the ▲ or ▼ function keys, select the entry Screen2 and then, using the Change
function key, select the desired type of display.
✔ Using the ▲ or ▼ function keys, select the entry Screen2 Values and then, using the
Change function key, activate the setting.
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
0DVNH DNWLY
%HWULHEVPDVNH7\S
0DVNH7\S :HUWH%DONHQ ႱႧ
0DVNH:HUWH
+LOIH
Ⴃ ]XU¾FN ႱႧ¦QGHUQ
%HWULHEVPDVNH
U 3%62// 3%3='HPSI9RU
U , B ,67 , B LVW %HWUDJ JO
U $8667 $XVVWHXHUJUDG JO
U )B $86 $ QWU IB $XVJ JOD
Ⴍ ]XU¾FN ¦QGHUQ
✔ Using the ▲ or ▼ function keys, select the first parameter and then activate the setting
using the Change function key. The display changes to the menu for selecting the
DriveObject.
%HWULHEVPDVNH
U
%,&2'2 3%62// 3%3='HPSI9RU
$XVZDKO
&8
U
*0 , B ,67 , B LVW %HWUDJ JO
%
UB,1)12
$8667 $XVVWHXHUJUDG JO
9(&72509
U )B $86 $ QWU IB $XVJ JOD
+LOIH
Ⴍ $EEUXFK 2.
✔ Using the function keys ▲ or ▼, select the desired DO and confirm the setting by
pressing the OK key. The menu Selection parameters appears.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 145
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
%HWULHEVPDVNH
&8B*0$XVZDKO3DUDPHWHU
$ OOH3DUDPHWHU
U 3%3='HPSI:RU W
+LOIH
Ⴍ ]XU¾FN 2.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
146 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 147
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Scaling
Description
You can set the control keys of the AOP as desired.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
148 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
/RNDO0RGHVSHLFKHUQ DNWLY 1HLQ ႱႧ
$XVLQ5HPRWH 1HLQ ႱႧ
/2&$/5(027(DXFKLP%HWULHE 1HLQ ႱႧ
5RWH$867DVWHZLUNWDOV $86 ႱႧ
+LOIH
Ⴍ ]XU¾FN ႱႧ¦QGHUQ
✔ Using the ▲ or ▼function keys, select the desired entry and change it using the Change
key.
✔ Confirm the entries using the Back function key.
You can find the description and setting options for the individual menu items in the
following.
Off in remote
● Setting Yes:
It is possible to switch off via the OFF key in remote mode
● Setting No:
OFF key not in effect in remote mode.
In LOCAL MODE, the OFF key is always in effect.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 149
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover
● Setting Yes:
In LOCAL MODE, left/right switching is possible using the key.
● Setting No (default setting):
The key is ineffective in LOCAL MODE.
In REMOTE mode, the key is always in effect.
For safety reasons, the CW/CCW key is disabled in the factory setting (pumps and fans must
normally only be operated in one direction). In the Operation status in LOCAL MODE, the
current direction of rotation is indicated by an arrow next to the operating mode.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
150 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
During the switchover from remote to local mode with the drive switched on (motor
running) the current actual value is set as the AOP setpoint.
See also
The keys of the AOP30 (Page 134)
Introduction
For protection against unintentional, improper setting of the parameters or accidental use of
the control keys, you can enable various inhibit functions.
%HGLHQVSHUUH
6LFKHUKHLWVVSHUUHQ 3DUDPHWULHUVSHUUH
=XJULIIVWXIH
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 151
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
6LFKHUKHLWVVSHUUHQ
%HGLHQVSHUUH QLFKWBDNWLY ႱႧ
3DUDPHWULHUVSHUUH QLFKWBDNWLY ¦QGHUQ
=XJULIIVWXIH 6WDQGDUG ¦QGHUQ
+LOIH
Ⴍ ]XU¾FN ႱႧ¦QGHUQ
✔ Using the function keys ▲ or ▼, select the Operator input inhibit function.
✔ Using the Change function key, select the active or not active setting.
• active.
The contents of parameters can be viewed, but not saved. If you want to save a
parameter, this message appears: Note: Inhibit function active.
The OFF key is in effect, the LOCAL/REMOTE, LEFT, RIGHT, INCREASE and
DECREASE keys are disabled.
The inhibit function is displayed by the key symbol .
• not active
No restriction of operation.
✔ Save the setting by pressing the Back function key.
Parameterization inhibit
Against unauthorized parameterization (password-protected)
It is possible to control the drive.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
152 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
✔ Using the Change function key, select the active or not active setting.
• active.
A window appears on the display for inputting and confirming a password. Enter an
ID number (up to 7 digits).
The contents of parameters can be viewed, but not saved. If you want to save a
parameter, this message appears: Parameterization inhibit - no control command
acceptance.
The control keys are not inhibited.
The inhibit is indicated by the key symbol .
If you have forgotten the password, you can switch off the parameterization inhibit as
follows:
1. Switch off the power supply.
2. Pull out the RS232 data cable.
3. Switch on the power supply and press and hold the key with the key symbol for 20
seconds. The key symbol extinguishes.
• not active
No restriction of operation.
✔ Save the setting by pressing the Back function key.
Access level
The scope of the displayed parameters conforms to the set access level.
The access level determines which parameters can be displayed and changed.
The higher the access level, the more functions are available.
The following access levels are possible:
Note
Changing the access levels
When you change the access level (e.g. from access level 2 to access level 3), you have to
select (during the device commissioning) the status 0: Ready. For further information, refer
to chapter Commissioning/Service Device Commissioning.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 153
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
+LOIH $NWXHOOH
+DXSWPHQí 6WçUXQJHQ
$NWXHOOH
6HO3DU
:DUQXQJHQ
%HWULHEVPDVNH
ÕQGHUQ $OWH6WçUXQJHQ
'LDJ $OWH:DUQXQJHQ
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
154 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Operation screen
Note
When there is a fault, the fault screen is automatically displayed.
Further settings
You can adjust the shape of the display and the displayed values to your liking. You can find
more detailed information on this in the section Defining Operation Screens.
Current faults
This menu shows the number and title of the currently active faults.
✔ Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the fault.
✔ Press the Ack. function key to acknowledge the fault.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 155
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Current alarms
This menu shows the number and title of the currently active alarms.
✔ Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the alarm.
Old faults
This menu displays the number and titles of the old faults. The top line shows the total
number of faults and the time of the fault (time at which the fault occurred). The faults are
displayed in ascending order in separate screens.
✔ Press the Tools key. Call up the chronologically arranged fault messages by selecting
older or newer.
✔ Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the fault.
Old alarms
This menu displays the number and titles of the old alarms. The top line shows the total
number of alarms and the time of the alarm (time at which the alarm occurred). The alarms
are displayed in ascending order in separate screens.
✔ Press the Tools key. Call up the chronologically arranged alarms by selecting older or
newer.
✔ Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the alarm.
3.7.6.3 Parameterization
(LQ]HOQHV'2
+DXSWPHQ¾
$OOH'2
3DUDPHWULHUXQJ
'DWHQVDW]DXVZDKO
3HUPDQHQWH
3DUDPHWHU¾EHUQDKPH
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
156 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Individual DO
The parameter lists for the individual DriveObjects can be opened in the displayed menu.
✔ Using the function keys ▲ or ▼, select the desired DO and confirm the selection with OK
.
✔ Select the desired parameters using the ▲ or ▼ function keys or by entering the
parameter number at the keypad.
Note
Parameters with identical functions may exist with the same parameter number in more than
one drive object, e.g. p0005.
✔ By pressing the Change function key, you can open a change window of the
parameter. Here, you can change the parameter by assigning values or by making a
selection from a list.
✔ Using the Help function key, you can call up the information for the selected parameter.
All DOs
In this menu, a numerically sorted list of the parameters of all of the DOs is displayed. In this
list, the same parameter number can appear several times. At the top left, you see the
number of the DO to which the parameter belongs in brackets.
✔ Select the desired parameters using the ▲ or ▼ function keys or by entering the
parameter number on the keypad. Parameters with identical functions may exist with
the same parameter number in more than one drive object, e.g. p0005.
✔ By pressing the Change function key, you can open a change window of the
parameter. Here, you can change the parameter by assigning values or by making a
selection from a list.
✔ Using the Help function key, you can call up the information for the selected parameter.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 157
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
'DWHQVDW ]DXVZDKO
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
158 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
+DXSWPHQ¾
6W¸UVSHLFKHU
:DUQXQJVVSHLFKHU
Alarm overview
If a fault occurs, the drive displays the fault and/or alarm on the operator panel in the Alarm
overview.
Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault/alarm buffer along with time the error occurred
and the time it was rectified. The time stamp relates to the relative system time in
milliseconds (r0969).
The diagram below shows that currently at least one active fault/alarm is present for the
"VECTOR" drive object. The two other drive objects are fault-free.
$ODUPRYHUYLHZ
✔ By pressing the Diag. key, you call up the Display diagnostics key. In this menu, you
can display the current and old faults and alarms.
^9(&725`'LDJQRVHDQ]HLJHQ
$NWXHOOH6WçUXQJHQ
$NWXHOOH:DUQXQJHQ
DOWH6WçUXQJHQ
DOWH:DUQXQJHQ
You can find further information on alarms and faults in chapter "Operation Screens".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 159
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
What is a fault?
A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional (unwanted)
status. This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered, for
example, from the winding temperature monitor for the asynchronous motor. The faults are
displayed and can be reported to a higher-level control system via PROFIBUS. In the factory
default setting, the message "converter fault" is also sent to a relay output. Once you have
rectified the cause of the fault, you have to acknowledge the fault message.
The list of faults and alarms indicates the type of response (OFF1, OFF2, and so on) for
each fault message.
Displaying faults
Faults are displayed by the red FAULT LED. Any faults that have occurred are automatically
displayed. Up to eight faults occurring at the same time are displayed.
9(&7256W¸UXQJHQ
) +DXSWQHW]VFKDOWHUB
) (UGVFKOXVV6W¸UXQJ
+LOIH
Ⴍ ]XU FN 4XLWW
What is an alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive. It does not result in the
drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged. Alarms are "self
acknowledging", that is, they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been
eliminated.
Displaying alarms
Alarms are indicated by the yellow ALARM LED. In addition, a corresponding note regarding
the cause will be displayed on the operator panel. Up to eight faults occurring at the same
time are displayed.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
160 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
9(&725:DUQXQJHQ
+ (UGVFKOXVVZDUQXQJDNWLY
+DXSWPHQ¾ *UXQG
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
.RPSOHWW
,QEHWULHEQDKPH LQEHWULHEQDKPH
$QWULHEV
6HUYLFH LQEHWULHEQDKPH 0RWRU
LGHQGLILNDWLRQ
/¾IWHUODXI]HLW
]XU¾FNVHW]HQ
Basic Commissioning
In this menu, the following parameters can be set:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 161
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Complete commissioning
In this menu, all of the parameters of the basic parameterization except for the parameters of
the DO B_Infeed can be set. More detailed information is available in Chapter "Basic
Parameterization with the AOP30".
Motor Identification
This function has not yet been implemented and will be made available at a later point in
time.
/¾IWHUODXI]HLW 6WXQGHQ
+LOIH ]XU¾FN 2.
Figure 3-146 Reset fan time
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
162 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
+DXSWPHQ¾ %HUHLW
*HU¦WHNRQILJXUDWLRQ
)HVWOHJXQJ$QWULHEVW\S
,QEHWULHEQDKPH *HU¦WH
6HUYLFH LQEHWULHEQDKPH
$QWULHEVEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
'DWHQEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
3DUDPHWHUUHVHW
*HU¦WHLQEHWULHEQDKPHS
%HUHLW
*HU¦WHNRQILJXUDWLRQ
)HVWOHJXQJ$QWULHEVW\S
$QWULHEVEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
'DWHQEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
+LOIH Ⴍ ]XU¾FN 2.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 163
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
✔ Using the function keys ▲ or ▼, select the desired parameter and confirm with the OK
key.
• 0: Ready = The device commissioning is concluded.
• 1: Device configuration = At the first commissioning of the devices, after run-up, the
device is in the "device configuration" state. To start the internal automatic first
commissioning of the drive unit, p0009 should be set to 0 (Ready) after the ID for
the actual topology (r0098) was transferred into the ID for the target topology
(p0099). To do this, it is sufficient to set a single index value of p0099[x] the same
as r0098[x]. Before the device has been completely commissioned, no other
parameter can be changed. After the first commissioning was carried-out, in this
state, when required, other basic device configuration parameters can be adapted
(e.g. the basic sampling time in p0110).
• 2: Determining drive type = The drive object types and/or the function modules for
individual drive objects can be changed or selected. To this end, the drive object
type can be set via p0107[0...15] and the function module can be set via
p0108[0...15] (see p0101[0...15])
• 3: Drive basic configuration = After the device has been commissioned for the first
time, basic changes can be made for the individual drive objects (e.g. sampling
times in p0111, p0112, p0115 and the number of data sets in p0120, p0130, p0140,
p0170, p0180).
• 4. Data basic configuration = After the device has been commissioned for the first
time, for the individual drive objects changes can be made regarding the
assignment of the components (p0121, p0131, p0141, p0151, p0161) to the
individual data sets and the assignment of the power module, motor and encoder to
the drive data sets (p0185, and onwards).
• 30: parameter reset = In order to bring the complete unit into the "first
commissioning" state or to load the parameters saved with p0977, p0009 must first
be set to this value. p0976 can then be changed to the required value.
You will find a list of the settable parameters below
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
164 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 165
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Note
Changing the access levels
When you change the access level (e.g., from access level 2 to access level 3), you must
select in a intermediate step status 0: Ready. You can find additional information on the
access levels in Chapter: Inhibit Functions in Section Access Levels.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
166 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
+DXSWPHQ¾ 6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
,QEHWULHEQDKPH $23
6HUYLFH (LQVWHOOXQJHQ
'DWXP8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ
(UZHLWHUWH(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQ]XU¾FNVHW]HQ
Control settings
In this menu, you can set the functions that the control keys of the AOP should carry out. For
example, you can select whether the OFF key of the AOP is assigned the function OFF1,
OFF2 or OFF3.
More detailed information is available in Chapter "Control settings".
Display settings
In this menu, you can make the following AOP settings:
● Illumination (on, off after 2 minutes, off)
● intensity of illumination
● Contrast
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 167
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ
%HOHXFKWXQJ (LQ ႱႧ
%HOHXFKWXQJVVW¦UNH ႱႧ
.RQWUDVW ႱႧ
Ⴍ ]XU¾FN ႱႧ¦QGHUQ
8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ
'DWXPWWPPMMMM
=HLW66PPVV
6\QFKURQLVDWLRQ NHLQH ႱႧ VSHLFKHUQ
Ⴑ& Ⴇ $EEUXFK
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
168 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Expanded settings
In this menu, you can make the following extended settings:
● Load the AOP settings from the CU
● Automatically acknowledge topology
● Mixed operation of servo/vector
● Database mode for the test bay
(UZHLWHUWH(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQYRQ&XODGHQ -D ႱႧ
7RSRORJLHDXWRPDWLVFKTXLWWLHUHQ -D ႱႧ
0LVFKEHWULHEYRQ6(5929(&725 1HLQ ႱႧ
'DWHQEDQN0RGXVI¾U3U¾IIHOG 1HLQ ႱႧ
Ⴍ ]XU¾FN ႱႧ¦QGHUQ
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 169
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQU¾FNVHW ]HQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQU¾FNVHW ]HQ
6WHXHU XQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
-D
'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ
%HWU1HLQ
LHEVPDVNHGHI LQLHUHQ
'DWXP8KU ]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQ]XU¾FNVHW ]HQ
Ⴍ 2.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
170 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
6RIWZDUH'DWHQEDQNYHUVLRQ
+DXSWPHQ¾
%DWWHULH]XVWDQG
.RPPXQLNDWLRQ
,QEHWULHEQDKPH $23
'LDJQRVH 7DVWDWXUWHVW
6HUYLFH
/('7HVW
)ODVK)6IRUPDWLHUHQ
3HUVLVWHQWH'DWHQEDQNO¸VFKHQ
Software/database version
Ⴍ ]XU¾FN
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 171
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Battery status
Shows the charging state of the AOP battery. The battery ensures that the data in the
database and the current time are retained. A battery voltage of ≤ 2 V is equal to 0%, and a
voltage of ≥ 3 V is equal to 100%. The data is secure up to a battery voltage of 2 V.
● If the battery voltage is ≤ 2.45 V, the message "Replace battery" is displayed.
● If the battery voltage is ≤ 2.30 V, the following message: "Warning: weak battery" is
displayed.
● If the battery voltage is ≤ 2 V, the message "Attention: The battery is dead" is displayed.
● If the drive is not activated for a long period of time, the time and status of the database
might not be displayed because of insufficient battery voltage. In this case, messages
appear that prompt you to replace the battery, load the database and set the time.
Information on replacing the battery can be found in the operating instructions of the
converter in Chapter Maintenance and Servicing.
%DWWHULHVSDQQXQJ 9
]XU¾FN
Figure 3-156 Battery status
Communication
In this menu, the status of the communication between AOP30 and CU are displayed. The
following items are displayed:
● Number of fault-free message frames
● Number of faulty message frames
● Number of character frame faults
● Number of overflow errors
● Number of start limiter errors
● Number of end limiter errors
● Number of character length errors
● Number of frame test mark errors
● Number of frame test mark errors
● Number of frame transfer errors
● Number of layer 2 message frame failures
● PPI status
● Number of layer 7 message frame failures
● Number of message frame repetitions (SD2)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
172 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
.RPPXQLNDWLRQ
)HKOHUIUHLH7HOHJUDPPH
IHKOHUKDIWH7HOHJUDPPH
=HLFKHQ)UDPH)HKOHU
3DULW¦WVIHKOHU
EHUODXI)HKOHU
6WDUWEHJUHQ]HU)HKOHU
Ⴍ ]XU¾FN
Keyboard test
In this menu, the function of each individual key of the AOP is tested. Keys that you press
are represented on a symbolic keyboard on the display. You can press the keys in any order
you wish. If each key has been pressed at least once, you can exit the menu by pressing the
Back key.
You can also exit the keyboard test menu by pressing and holding any key.
LED test
In this menu, the LEDs of the AOP can be function tested.
Flash FS formatting
The ACX files, which the drive reads for describing the parameters and alarms, are
temporarily saved in the flash file system (and then deleted after parsing)
To rule out the risk of files remaining behind, the Flash FS can be manually deleted via this
menu item.
NOTICE
The formatting of the flash memory begins without further prompting immediately after you
press OK.
Note
The CompactFlash card is not formatted.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 173
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
NOTICE
The database is deleted immediately, without further confirmation, after pressing OK.
3.7.6.9 Language
+DXSWPHQ¾
6SUDFKH
Selecting a language
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
174 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware) 4
4.1 Overview of parameter macro interconnections in table format
Overview
The table below provides an overview of the parameter macros and the signals
interconnected by the different macros. For a detailed description of the specific parameters
of a macro and the terminals and item codes assigned to these parameters, refer to the
section entitled "Parameters for Interconnecting Signals (Page 318) "
Macro
Autostart macros
PM001501 on VECTORMV Default interconnections
PM001540 on VECTORMV Default interconnections
PM001540 on B_INFMV Default interconnections
Optional macros
PM001555 Interconnections for option G66, diagnostic module PADU 8
PM001557 Analog O PSA interconnections for options K21 and K20
PM001558 Analog O PSA interconnections for options K22 and K20
PM001571 Interconnections for option Emergency Button 1
PM001580 Interconnections for lamps and StartStop button
PM001582 Interconnections for option L27-L29 Bypass 1
PM001584 Interconnections for option L55 standstill heating
PM001585 Interconnections for options N20, N21 capacitor tripping device
circuit breaker
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 175
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
Note
Observe that the following protection settings have already been specified via the product
designation (MLFB) and tested in the routine testing:
• Current and voltage limits
• Command "short-circuiter ON"
• Command "TAS ON
WARNING
Safety information regarding personnel protection
Opening the doors during operation can lead to death or serious bodily injury.
While operating, the converter is subjected to dangerous voltages.
Check the door locks during commissioning!
4.3.1 Introduction
Various hardware tests are required to ensure the converter is working correctly.
The tests listed in the "Mandatory hardware tests" section check the safety-related
components and are compulsory.
The tests listed in the "Recommended hardware tests" section check the peripherals. It is
advisable to perform these tests, too.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
176 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
WARNING
Danger! High voltage
No power may be supplied to the converter when operating the circuit breaker in test mode.
Failure to observe this warning may result in serious injury or death.
There are various ways of making sure the unit is isolated from the power supply:
• Confirm that the circuit breaker is switched to the TEST position.
• Confirm that the medium-voltage power supply is switched off.
• Do not connect the cable from the switch to the converter.
Requirements
The external interconnection between the control signals and the check-back signals from
the circuit breaker to the controller must be installed.
Test mode
The test mode is activated using parameters p6650 and p6651.
✔ Set parameter p6650 to "Test mode line breaker (1)" in the infeed.
Control parameters
Parameters p6690 and r6672 to r6676 are available for use as control parameters.
Parameter p6690 shows the status of the check-back signal from the circuit breaker.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 177
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
The opening and monitoring times are given by parameters r6672 to r6676.
Note
The interrupting time must not exceed 100 ms.
✔ Once you have successfully completed operation in test mode, reset parameters p6650
and p6651.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
178 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
Note
The two DC links must be precharged to the set value.
The DC links are regularly recharged to this value.
Check whether the two DC link halves are charging symmetrically.
Switching off the precharging and testing the fault initiating switch
The switch key can only be inserted if the value has dropped below 0.01 x Uzk_Nominal
after the waiting period has elapsed!
NOTICE
The switch key can no longer be inserted during precharging of the DC-link beyond a value
of 0.01 x Uzk_Nominal!
The make-proof grounding switch must never be actuated if the auxiliary power is switched
off!
The make-proof grounding switch can only be activated if the DC-link voltage has dropped
to below 1% of the nominal DC-link voltage and a waiting period of 125s/44s has elapsed.
✔ Switch off the auxiliary power supply (1 AC 230 V). The switch key must not be
inserted.
✔ Check the check-back signals of the make-proof grounding switch.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 179
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
4.3.2.3 Testing the door interlocking and the door limit switch
Description
The doors are only unlocked if:
● the grounding switch has been engaged and
● the insulation monitoring has reported "ground connection."
✔ Check the locking mechanism by actuating the door handles several times.
✔ Switch off the auxiliary power 1 AC 230 V. The doors must remain locked
✔ Open the doors in succession in the switched off state. A fault message must appear
and the converter must not be possible to switch on.
✔ Acknowledge the fault message after closing the corresponding doors.
Description
There are two use cases for this test:
● If there is no power being supplied to the circuit breaker, the level of the DC link voltage
at which the circuit breaker should cut in can be adjusted. This also activates the
undervoltage tripping level when the DC link voltage decays.
● Testing the switching sequence for precharging and circuit breakers
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
180 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
Note
This manual does not go into further detail about testing in accordance with the machine
directives.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 181
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
To activate the test mode, a binary input from a TM module must be wired to p6651 and an
H signal must be specified on the input. Setting p6651 to 1 is not sufficient.
Description
Note
This test is only required on air-cooled converters!
The main fans in the power unit are activated when the converter is switched on.
As soon as the fans have run up, the nominal differential pressure is reached.
If, after the switch-on monitoring time has elapsed, the differential pressure is not higher than
the set threshold value, an alarm or a fault shutdown will occur with the corresponding
message.
✔ Connect the auxiliary voltage for the main fans and the motor protection switch.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
182 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
✔ Set parameter p6650 to 4 (main fan test mode infeed) in the Infeed.
✔ Interconnect the signal source for activating/deactivating test mode to parameter 6651
using a switch box.
After the time specified in p6794 has elapsed, the differential pressure (r6801) must
have been established and must be well above the warning threshold (r6790).
✔ Switch off the motor protection switch of one fan.
The shutdown of the motor protection switch of one fan should lead to the fault
shutdown with the following error message:
"49110 fan monitoring: Differential pressure < interference
threshold"
Note
Test of the main fans for the sinusoidal filter option (Y15)
If you set the sinusoidal filter option, then also check the associated fans.
The activation takes place together with the other main fans.
Description
Note
This test is only required on air-cooled converters!
The redundant main fan is activated if one of the main fans for normal operation fails during
operation.
✔ Set parameter p6650 to 6 (redundant main fan test mode) in the Infeed.
✔ Interconnect the signal source for activating/deactivating test mode on parameter
P6651 using a switch box.
Only the redundant main fan should switch on when you switch the power supply on.
Description
The auxiliary fans are activated
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 183
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.4 Checking the signal wiring
● by the temperature evaluation unit, if the temperature in the converter exceeds the set
value (T2).
● From the software if the crowbar is triggered or the test mode of the auxiliary fans is
selected.
Note
The protection switch for the auxiliary fans must be switched on.
Description
A noise-free connection between the internal and external supply voltage can be achieved
by connecting the 0 V potentials to each other and grounding them. This also eliminates the
need for the control circuit insulation monitor required by DIN EN 60204-1.
3
1 3
0 0
,QWHUQDO ([WHUQDO
FRQVXPHUV FRQVXPHUV
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
184 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Parameter types
The following adjustable and display parameters are available:
● Adjustable parameters (write/read)
These parameters have a direct impact on the behavior of a function.
Example: Ramp-up and ramp-down time of a ramp function generator
● Display parameters (read only)
These parameters are used to display internal variables.
Example: Current motor current
3DUDPHWHU
All these drive parameters can be read and changed via PROFIBUS using the mechanisms
defined in the PROFIdrive profile.
Parameter categories
The parameters of the individual drive objects are categorized into data sets as follows:
● Data-set-independent parameters
These parameters exist only once per drive object.
● Data-set-dependent parameters
These parameters can exist several times for each drive object and can be addressed via
the parameter index for reading and writing. A distinction is made between various types
of data set:
– CDS: Command Data Set
By configuring several command data sets and switching between them, the drive can
be operated with different pre-configured signal sources.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 185
Start
7HUPLQDO0RGXOH
2SWLRQ%RDUG
6XSSO\
'ULYHQ
'ULYH
'ULYH
'DWDVHWLQGHSHQGHQW
GULYHSDUDPHWHUV
&'6&RPPDQG'DWD6HW
''6'ULYH'DWD6HW
0RWRUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ
('6(QFRGHU'DWD6HW
0'60RWRU'DWD6HW
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
186 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Resetting parameters
The parameters can be reset to the factory setting as follows:
● Reset parameters - current drive object
p0970 = 1; automatically reset to 0
● Reset parameters - all parameters drive object "Control Unit"
p0009 = 30 parameter reset
p0976 = 1; automatically reset to 0
Access level
The parameters are subdivided into access levels. The List Manual specifies in which access
level the parameter is displayed and can be changed. The required access levels 0 to 4 can
be set in p0003.
Note
Parameter p0003 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 187
Start
Description
Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and
internal control variables.
BICO technology (Binector Connector Technology) allows the drive to be adapted to a wide
variety of conditions.
Digital and analog signals, which can be connected freely by means of BICO parameters,
are identified by the prefix BI, BO, CI or CO in their parameter name. These parameters are
identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams.
Note
The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO
technology.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
188 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Description
To interconnect two signals, a BICO input parameter (signal sink) must be assigned to the
desired BICO output parameter (signal source).
The following information is required in order to connect a binector/connector input to a
binector/connector output:
• Binectors: Parameter number, bit number, and drive object ID
• Connectors without an index: Parameter number and drive object ID
• Connectors with an index: Parameter number, index, and drive object ID
%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW %,%LQHFWRULQSXW
&2&RQQHFWRURXWSXW &,&RQQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH 6LJQDOVLQN
%,
%2 S[[[[\
U
&,
&2ZLWKRXWLQGH[ S[[[[\
U
&2ZLWKLQGH[
,QGH[ >@ U &,
>@ U S[[[[\
>@ U >@
>@ U
Note
A signal source (BO) can be connected to any number of signal sinks (BI).
A signal sink (BI) can only be connected to one signal source (BO) at a time.
The BICO parameter interconnection can be implemented in different command data sets
(CDS). The different interconnections are activated by switching data sets.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 189
Start
'ULYH
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ,QGH[QXPEHU
REMHFW
%LW ಹ ಹ ಹ
'HYLFHHJ&8
2ZQREMHFW
([DPSOHVRIVLJQDOVRXUFHV
ELQ ELQ ELQ
()&KH[ದದ!&2>@
GH] GH] GH]
Sample interconnections
● Example 1: Interconnection of digital signals
Suppose you want to operate a drive via terminals DI 0 and DI 1 on the Control Unit using
jog 1 and jog 2.
%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW %,%LQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH 6LJQDOVLQN
9
S&
; ', -RJ
U
S&
; ', -RJ
U
9
S&
; ', ,QWHUQDO -RJ
U
S&
; ',
U
,QWHUQDO -RJ
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
190 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW %,%LQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH 6LJQDOVLQN
9 'ULYH
S&
; ', 2))
U
2))
S&
2))
'ULYH
S&
2))
2))
S&
2))
Copying drives
When a drive is copied, the interconnection is copied with it.
Binector-connector-converter
● Several digital signals are converted to a 32-bit integer double word or to a 16-bit integer
word.
● p2080[0...15] BI: PROFIdrive PZD send bit-wise
Connector-binector-converter
● A 32-bit integer double word or a 16-bit integer word is converted to individual digital
signals.
● p2099[0...1] CI: PROFIdrive PZD selection receive bit-wise
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 191
Start
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
192 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
&'6
S U U &'6VHOHFWHG
S
S
S W
6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
W
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 193
Start
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
194 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Note
In STARTER, you can copy the command data sets (Drive -> Configuration -> "Command
data sets" tab page).
You can select the displayed command data set in the relevant STARTER screens.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 195
Start
Note
In STARTER, you can copy the drive data sets (Drive -> Configuration -> "Drive data sets"
tab page).
You can select the displayed drive data set in the relevant STARTER screens.
Note
In STARTER, you can set the drive data sets via the drive configuration.
Parameters Description
p0120 Power Module data sets (PDS) number
p0130 Motor data sets (MDS) number
p0139 Copy motor data set (MDS)
p0140 Encoder data sets (EDS) number
p0170 Command data set (CDS) number
p0180 Drive data set (DDS) number
p0186 Motor data sets (MDS) number
p0187 Encoder 1 encoder data set number
p0188 Encoder 2 encoder data set number
p0189 Encoder 3 encoder data set number
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
196 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Parameters Description
p0809 Copy command data set CDS
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0
p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1
p0812 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 2
p0813 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 3
p0819[0...2] Copy drive data set DDS
p0820 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0
p0821 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1
p0822 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 2
p0823 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 3
p0824 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 4
Description
By changing over the units, parameters and process quantities for input and output can be
changed over to an appropriate system of units (US units or as per unit quantities (%)).
The following supplementary conditions apply when changing over units:
● Parameters of the type plate of the drive converter or the motor rating plate can be
changed over between SI/US units; however, a per unit representation is not possible.
● After changing over the units parameter, all parameters that are assigned to one of the
units group dependent on it, are all changed over to the new system of units.
● A parameter is available to select technological units (p0595) to represent technological
quantities in the technology controller.
● If the units are converted to per unit quantities and the reference quantity changed, the
percentage value entered in a parameter is not changed.
Example:
– A fixed speed of 80% corresponds, for a reference speed of 1500 RPM, to a value of
1200 RPM.
– If the reference speed is changed to 3000 RPM, then the value of 80% is kept and
now means 2400 RPM.
Restrictions
● When a unit changeover occurs, rounding to the decimal places is carried out. This can
lead to the original value being changed by up to one decimal place.
● If a referenced form is selected and the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are changed
retrospectively, the referenced values of some of the control parameters are also
adjusted to ensure that the control behavior is unaffected.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 197
Start
● If the reference values (p2000 to p2007) are changed offline in STARTER, it can lead to
boundary violations of the parameter values, which cause error messages during loading
to the drive.
Groups of units
Every parameter that can be changed over is assigned to a units group, that, depending on
the group, can be changed over within certain limits.
This assignment and the unit groups can be read for each parameter in the parameter list in
the List Manual.
The unit groups can be individually switched using 4 parameters (p0100, p0349, p0505 and
p0595).
Function in STARTER
To call up the function for converting units in STARTER, choose Drive object ->
Configuration -> Units. The reference parameters can be found under Drive object ->
Configuration -> Reference parameters
Parameter Description
s
p0010 Commissioning parameter filter
p0100 IEC/NEMA motor standard
p0349 Selection of units system, motor equivalent circuit diagram data
p0505 Selection of units system
p0595 Selection of technological unit
p0596 Reference variable of technological unit
p2000 CO: Reference frequency/speed
p2001 CO: Reference voltage
p2002 CO: Reference current
p2003 CO: Reference torque
r2004 CO: Reference power
p2005 CO: Reference angle
p2007 CO: Reference acceleration
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
198 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Description
Reference values, corresponding to 100%, are required for the statement of units as
percentages. These reference values are entered in parameters p2000 to p2007. They are
computed during the calculation through p0340 = 1 or in STARTER during drive
configuration. After calculation in the drive, these parameters are automatically protected via
p0573 = 1 from boundary violation through a new calculation (p0340). This eliminates the
need to adjust the references values in a PROFIdrive controller whenever a new calculation
of the reference parameters via p0340 takes place.
Note
If a referenced form is selected and the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are changed
retrospectively, the referenced values of some of the control parameters are also adjusted to
ensure that the control behavior is unaffected.
Note
If the reference values (p2000 to p2007) are changed offline in STARTER, it can lead to
boundary violations of the parameter values, which cause error messages during loading to
the drive.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 199
Start
Parameter Description
p0340 p0340 Automatic calculation of motor/control parameters
p0573 Disable automatic reference value calculation
p2000 Reference speed reference frequency
p2001 Reference voltage
p2002 Reference current
p2003 Reference torque
r2004 Reference power
p2005 Reference angle
p2007 Reference acceleration
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
200 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions 6
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Basic settings
S S>0@ /
0
&
)LOWHU
Figure 6-1 Equivalent circuit diagram, asynchronous motor with output filter and cable
Note
The parameters described in this section are configured interactively by the STARTER
wizard.
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If the
values for a delta connection are the only data available, all parameters must be divided by a
factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 201
Start
Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
202 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Output filter
If the output filter or the motor reactor options are selected then the following parameters are
required, or the drive will use the default values if a Siemens filter is used by selecting
P230=10,000. Filters or reactors made by other manufacturers need to be entered manually.
Operating modes
The drive offers the following operating modes:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 203
Start
Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Description
Following commissioning, motor identification can be carried out automatically. This
determines motor data more precisely by means of rotating measurement. No static
moments must be allowed to act on the drive (no load torque).
DANGER
A running motor may result in death, serious personal injury or severe material damage.
When identifying the motor data, motor movements are initiated, which can reach the
maximum motor speed.
The emergency STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning. To protect
the machines and personnel, the relevant safety regulations must be observed
Identification process
● Switch the identification on by setting p1900=1. Identification begins with the next ON
command.
● The motor performs various test movements and the right-hand rotary field is accelerated
to its rated speed.
● Once identification has been successfully completed, p1900 is automatically reset to 0.
● Identification ends with an internal pulse block, and the motor coasts to a standstill.
The following data is identified:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
204 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Note
If autoidentification is not possible, manual optimization can be carried out instead. To
perform manual optimization the drive needs to be turned at a low frequency (approx. 1
Hz) while p6926 is adjusted from 0-200% so that the 6th harmonic in the current (r78) is
minimized.
Description
The flux controller determines the start of field weakening. The starting point can be changed
via P6701. If the motor voltage reaches the value set in P6701 then field suppression is
activated.
The default setting is P6701 = 100% of the rated motor voltage. If the motor is also designed
for higher voltages then P6701 can also be increased. If the converter reaches the
modulation depth limit before this voltage is reached then field weakening is activated
sooner. In this case the controller stays at the modulation depth limit and has no spare
capacity.
The modulation depth limit can be adjusted using the parameter P1803. The maximum
modulation range possible is determined by the UF table, however. The controller therefore
uses the minimum from P1803 and takes the maximum from the internal UF table.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 205
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Note
• If an encoder is not being used, a certain starting or holding current must be configured
so that the motor does not start to drift when it is at a standstill (P1610). The current level
should be chosen such that it is slightly above the maximum static load current when the
motor is at a standstill. Dynamic torques when starting up or even static load torques at
low speeds can be ignored. As a result, a low current of about 10% (default) will generally
suffice.
• Parameter P1610 has no effect when using a encoder. A sensible value should
nevertheless be entered to ensure that the switchover in the event of encoder faults when
not using a encoder proceeds smoothly.
• The speed control gain chosen should not exceed 10, since only a filtered model speed is
available during encoderless operation.
• If there is motion when the speed is set to zero (imbalance or drifting from the speed
setpoint) then the total moment of inertia in P341 / P342 should be reduced. Parameter
R345 (rated motor acceleration time), which is determined from the motor data and the
total inertia, gives an indication of the correct moment of inertia.
• For further information about setting and optimizing the speed controller, please refer to
section "Functions / Drive functions" in chapter "Speed controller".
See also
Speed controller (Page 231)
WARNING
Danger! High voltage
High voltages can cause death or serious injury if the safety rules are not observed or if the
equipment is handled incorrectly.
As soon as the motor starts to rotate, a high voltage is generated.
Safely disconnect the motor. If this is not possible, the motor must be locked by a holding
brake, for example.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
206 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Note
If pulse inhibition of the converter occurs (fault or OFF2), synchronous motors can generate
high terminal voltages in the field weakening range, which could lead to overvoltage in the
DC link. The following possibilities exist to protect the drive system from being destroyed due
to overvoltage:
• Restrict (p0643 = 0) maximum speed (p1082)
• External voltage limiter or chopper or other measures appropriate to the application (e.g.
circuit breaker on the motor side).
CAUTION
Overvoltages can result in damage to the converter.
The converter's components are only designed for a specific voltage.
With p0643 = 1, it must be ensured that there is sufficiently high and suitable overvoltage
protection. If necessary, precautionary measures should be taken on the system side.
Basic settings
Figure 6-2 Equivalent Circuit Diagram, Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor with Output Reactor and Cable
Note
The parameters described in this section are configured interactively by the STARTER
wizard.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 207
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
208 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Motor reactor
If the motor reactor option has been chosen, the following parameters must be entered. A
permanently-excited synchronous machine cannot be operated near a sinus filter.
Operating modes
The drive offers the following operating modes:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 209
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Description
Following commissioning, motor identification can be carried out automatically. This
determines motor data more precisely by means of rotating measurement. No static
moments must be allowed to act on the drive (no load torque).
DANGER
A running motor may result in death, serious personal injury or severe material damage.
When identifying the motor data, motor movements are initiated, which can reach the
maximum motor speed.
The emergency STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning. To protect
the machines and personnel, the relevant safety regulations must be observed
Identification process
● Switch the identification on by setting p1900=1. Identification begins with the next ON
command.
● The motor performs various test movements and the right-hand rotary field is accelerated
to its rated speed.
● Once identification has been successfully completed, p1900 is automatically reset to 0.
● Identification ends with an internal pulse block, and the motor coasts to a standstill.
The following data is identified:
Note
If autoidentification is not possible, manual optimization can be carried out instead. To
perform manual optimization the drive needs to be turned at a low frequency (approx. 1
Hz) while p6926 is adjusted from 0-200% so that the 6th harmonic in the current (r78) is
minimized.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
210 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Description
Pole position identification uses a test signal to determine the position of the rotor. The
following parameters determine the type and duration of the test signal.
Note
At speeds > 5%, the PEM control corrects the initially estimated pole position. An more
imprecise pole position procedure therefore has no impact on the orientation
Saturation-based procedure
If the motor has different inductance distribution in the d and q axis the procedures
● p1980 = 4: for Ld > Lq
● p1980 = 5: for Ld < Lq
can be selected. A possible data sheet or the identification results shown in the "Pole
position identification" section provide more information about the distribution. To provide
positive pole position identification, the difference between the d and the q inductance should
be at least 5%. The test current for this procedure is comparatively low (p1993 = approx.
10% of rated motor current).
If Ld and Lq are approximately equal, the p1980 = 1 procedure should be chosen. This
procedure requires high current levels (p1993 = approx. 50-100% of rated motor current)
and causes correspondingly high levels of noise and movement.
Note
The low- and high-level signal response of the inductances can be different. Procedures 4
and 5, for example, can produce perfectly acceptable results with a low test current, even
when Ld and Lq are more or less identical in terms of the high-level signal response. It is
therefore vital that the procedures are tested in advance.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 211
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Motion-based procedures
Procedure
● p1980 = 10
does not need a encoder. It injects the test current entered in p1993 and performs an
electrical 360° movement within the time specified in p1994. The motor aligns itself and
follows the current phasor. The test current should be orientated towards the maximum
blocking torque so that blocked drives can also be aligned.
Procedure
● p1980 = 11
requires a encoder. The motor oscillates slightly, and these movements are detected and
evaluated with the encoder signal.
Note
If the oscillations are not strong enough, because the encoder does not have the necessary
resolution, the amplitude of the test current must be increased (p1993) or the frequency
reduced (p1995). Although this procedure is extremely accurate, it is only of limited use in
the case of fully-braked drives. The amplitude of the test current may have to be set very
high.
Test mode
Test mode can be used to find the best procedure for a particular motor. If test mode is
active (P1983 = 1), a cyclic permanent identification using the selected procedure (P1980) is
carried out the next time a pulse is issued. The phase displacement (r1984) is cyclically
updated and should fluctuate by no more than +/- 30°.
NOTICE
In test mode, the drive can move several pole pitches
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
212 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Operating modes
In situations where a encoder is not being used, the pole position is identified each time a
pulse is issued, as the positional information is usually lost when the pulse is blocked.
If a encoder is being used, the response can be selected using P1982:
● p1982 = 1: The pole position is only determined
– before a pulse is issued for the first time following encoder errors
– before a pulse is issued for the first time after switching to a new operating mode
(p1300).
● p1982 = 2: The pole position is determined each time before a pulse is issued.
● p1982 = 1: The pole position is only determined:
– Following every complete or partial CU module boot
Description
The flux controller determines the start of field weakening. The starting point can be changed
via P6701. If the motor voltage reaches the value set in P6701 then field suppression is
activated.
The default setting is P6701 = 100% of the rated motor voltage. If the motor is also designed
for higher voltages then P6701 can also be increased. If the converter reaches the
modulation depth limit before this voltage is reached then field weakening is activated
sooner. In this case the controller stays at the modulation depth limit and has no spare
capacity.
The modulation depth limit can be adjusted using the parameter P1803. The maximum
modulation range possible is determined by the UF table, however. The controller therefore
uses the minimum from P1803 and takes the maximum from the internal UF table.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 213
Start
Functions
6.3 Note regarding the commissioning of separately excited synchronous motors
Note
• If an encoder is not being used, a certain starting or holding current must be configured
so that the motor does not start to drift when it is at a standstill (P1610). The current level
should be chosen such that it is slightly above the maximum static load current when the
motor is at a standstill. Dynamic torques when starting up or even static load torques at
low speeds can be ignored. As a result, a low current of about 10% (default) will generally
suffice.
• Parameter P1610 has no effect when using a encoder. A sensible value should
nevertheless be entered to ensure that the switchover in the event of encoder faults when
not using a encoder proceeds smoothly.
• The speed control gain chosen should not exceed 10, since only a filtered model speed is
available during encoderless operation.
• If there is motion when the speed is set to zero (imbalance or drifting from the speed
setpoint) then the total moment of inertia in P341 / P342 should be reduced. Parameter
R345 (rated motor acceleration time), which is determined from the motor data and the
total inertia, gives an indication of the correct moment of inertia.
• For further information about setting and optimizing the speed controller, please refer to
section "Functions / Drive functions" in chapter "Speed controller".
See also
Speed controller (Page 231)
6.4.1.1 Description
In the extended setpoint channel, setpoints from the setpoint source are conditioned for
motor control.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
214 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
The setpoint for motor control can also originate from the technology controller (see
"Technology controller").
6HWSRLQWVRXUFHV
6XSSOHPHQWDU\
0DLQVHWSRLQW
VHWSRLQW
0DLQVXSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
VHWSRLQWVFDOLQJ
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQOLPLWLQJ
GLUHFWLRQUHYHUVDO
6XSSUHVVLRQEDQGZLGWKV
VHWSRLQWOLPLWDWLRQ
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO 0RWRUFRQWURO
6HUYRYHFWRU
Setpoint sources
The closed-loop control setpoint can be interconnected from various sources using BICO
technology (e.g. to p1070 CI: main setpoint (see function diagram 3030)).
There are various options for setpoint input:
● Fixed speed setpoints
● Motorized potentiometer
● Jog
● Field bus
– Setpoint via PROFIBUS, for example
● Via the analog inputs of the following exemplary components:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 215
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.1.2 Jog
Description
This function can be selected via digital inputs or via a field bus (e.g. PROFIBUS). The
setpoint is, therefore, predefined via p1058[D] and p1059[D].
When a jog signal is present, the motor is accelerated to the jog setpoint with the
acceleration ramp of the ramp function generator (referred to the maximum speed p1082;
see diagram "Function chart: jog 1 and jog 2"). After the jog signal has been deselected, the
motor is decelerated via the set ramp of the ramp function generator.
CAUTION
The jog function is not PROFIdrive compatible!
6LJQDO
-RJ
6LJQDO
212))
(IIHFWLYH
WRWDOVHWSRLQWU
-RJVHWSRLQW
(IIHFWLYH
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
216 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
-RJ
W
S
'LJLWDOLQSXW
)LHOGEXV -RJ
W
S
Q
S
S
W
S
S
S
S
S
S
Jog properties
● If both jog signals are issued at the same time, the current speed is maintained (constant
velocity phase).
● Jog setpoints are approached and exited via the ramp function generator.
● The jog function can be activated from the "ready to start" status and from the OFF1
deceleration ramp.
● If ON/OFF1 = "1" and jog are selected simultaneously, ON/OFF1 has priority.
● OFF2 and OFF3 have priority over jogging.
● In jog mode, the main speed setpoints (r1078) and the supplementary setpoints 1 and 2
(p1155 and p1160) are inhibited.
● The suppression bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094) and the minimum limit (p1080) in the
setpoint channel are also active in jog mode.
● In jog mode, ZSWA.02 (operation enabled) is set to "0" because the speed setpoint has
not been enabled for control.
● The ramp function generator cannot be frozen (via p1141) in jog mode (r0046.31 = 1).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 217
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Jog sequence
32:(521
63RZHURQGLVDEOH
! =6:$( [
=6:$( !
&RPPLVVLRQLQJILQLVKHG
S DQGS
$8667:$(
!
$8667:$(
9RQ(3WHUPLQDOV
SRZHUXQLW
65HDG\WRSRZHUXS
=6:$
!
=6:$ !
'ULYHDWVWDQGVWLOO
0DLQFRQWDFWRURII
:DLWIRUMRJ
-RJ
67:$! +:SXOVHHQDEOH
ุ >)3@
-RJ
67:$!
65HDG\WRUXQ 6F-RJ
=6:$ GHFHOHUDWLRQUDPS
! =6:$ !
(QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ67:$ =6:$ ! 5XQGRZQGULYHXVLQJUDPS
/LQHFRQWDFWRU2Q IXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRUXQWLO
:DLWIRUSUHFKDUJH _Q_QBPLQSVSHHG
WKUHVKROGVWDQGVWLOO
! PRQLWRULQJ
(QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ67:$
5HDG\IURP0RWRU0RGXOHU
'HPDJQHWL]DWLRQFRPSOHWH -RJ -RJ
U ุ
,QIHHGUHDG\ -RJ -RJ
S
62SHUDWLRQ
=6:$
! =6:$
=6:$
!
SXOVHVHQDEOHG
FRQWUROOHUHQDEOHG
HQDEOHDVVRFLDWHGMRJVHWSRLQW
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
218 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters Description
p1055[CDS] BI: Jog bit 0
p1056[CDS] BI: Jog bit 1
p1058[DDS] Jog 1 speed setpoint
p1059[DDS] Jog 2 speed setpoint
p1082[DDS] Maximum speed
p1120[DDS] Ramp function generator ramp-up time
p1121[DDS] Ramp function generator ramp-down time
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 219
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Description
This function can be used to specify preset speed setpoints. The fixed setpoints are defined
in parameters and selected via binector inputs. Both the individual fixed setpoints and the
effective fixed setpoint are available for further interconnection via a connector output (e.g. to
connector input p1070 - CI: main setpoint).
Properties
● Number of fixed setpoints: Fixed setpoint 1 to 15
● Selection of fixed setpoints: Binector input bits 0 to 3
– Binector input bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 = 0 -> setpoint = 0 active
– Unused binector inputs have the same effect as a "0" signal
Parameters Description
Adjustable parameters
p1001[D] ... p1015[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 ... CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15
p1020[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0
p1021[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1
p1022[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2
p1023[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3
Display parameters
r1024 CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1197 Current fixed speed setpoint number
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
220 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Description
This function is used to simulate an electromechanical potentiometer for setpoint input.
You can switch between manual and automatic mode for setpoint input. The specified
setpoint is routed to an internal ramp function generator. Setting values, start values and
braking with OFF1 do not require the ramp function generator of the motorized
potentiometer.
The output of the ramp function generator for the motorized potentiometer is available for
further interconnection via a connector output (e.g. interconnection to connector input p1070
- CI: main setpoint, an additional ramp function generator is then active).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 221
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters Description
p1030[DDS] Motorized potentiometer, configuration
p1035[CDS] BI: Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise
p1036[CDS] BI: Motorized potentiometer, lower setpoint
p1037[DDS] Motorized potentiometer, maximum speed
p1038[DDS] Motorized potentiometer, minimum speed
p1039[CDS] BI: Motorized potentiometer, inversion
p1040[DDS] Motorized potentiometer start value
p1041[CDS] BI: Motorized potentiometer, manual/automatic
p1042[CDS] CI: Motorized potentiometer, automatic setpoint
p1043[CDS] BI: Motorized potentiometer, accept setpoint
p1044[CDS] CI: Motorized potentiometer, setting value
r1045 CO: Motorized potentiometer, speed setpoint in front of the ramp function generator
p1047[DDS] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-up time
p1048[DDS] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-down time
r1050 CO: Motorized potentiometer, setpoint after the ramp function generator
p1082[DDS] Maximum speed
Description
The supplementary setpoint can be used to incorporate correction values from lower-level
controllers. This can be easily carried out using the addition point for the
main/supplementary setpoint in the setpoint channel. Both variables are imported
simultaneously via two separate or one setpoint source and added in the setpoint channel.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
222 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
0DLQVHWSRLQW
VFDOLQJ
S>&@
0DLQVHWSRLQW U
S>&@
U
6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
S>&@
U
6XSSOHPHQWDU\
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQOLPLWLQJ
VHWSRLQWVFDOLQJ
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQUHYHUVDO
S>&@
6XSSUHVVLRQEDQGZLGWKV
6HWSRLQWOLPLWDWLRQ
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO
Parameters Description
Adjustable parameters
p1020[C] CI: Main setpoint
p1071[C] CI: Main setpoint scaling
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint
p1076[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling
Display parameters
r1073[C] CO: Main setpoint effective
r1077[C] CO: Supplementary setpoint effective
r1078[C] CO: Total setpoint effective
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 223
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Description
A reverse operation involves a direction reversal. A direction reversal in the setpoint channel
can be triggered by selecting direction reversal p1113[CDS].
If, on the other hand, a negative or positive setpoint is not to be preselected via the setpoint
channel, this can be prevented via parameter p1110[CDS or p1111[CDS]. However, the
following settings for minimum speed (p1080) in the setpoint channel are still operative. With
the minimum speed, the motor can turn in a negative direction, although p1110 = 1 is set.
'HDFWLYDWHSRVLWLYHGLUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
S>&@
'HDFWLYDWHQHJDWLYHGLUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
S>&@
'LUHFWLRQUHYHUVDO
S>&@
6NLSIUHTXHQF\EDQGV
VHWSRLQWOLPLWDWLRQV
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO
Parameters Description
p1110[CDS] BI: Inhibit negative direction
p1111[CDS] BI: Inhibit positive direction
p1113[CDS ] BI: Direction reversal
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
224 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Description
In the range 0 U/min to setpoint speed, a drive train (e.g. motor, coupling, shaft, machine)
can have one or more points of resonance, which can result in vibrations. The suppression
bandwidths can be used to prevent operation in the resonance frequency range.
The limit frequencies can be set via p1080[DDS] and p1082[DDS]. These limits can be
changed during operation with the connectors p1085[CDS] and p1088[CDS].
S>'@ S>'@
6XSSUHVVLRQ
EDQGZLGWKV
S>'@
S>'@
S>&@
S
0LQ U
S>'@
0LQVSHHGOLPLWDWLRQ 0D[VSHHGOLPLWDWLRQ
S>'@ \ \
[ \ [ [ \
U U
[
S'@
S>&@
S 0D[ U
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 225
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Table 6-18 Overview of most important parameters (suppression bandwidths and setpoint limitation)
Parameters Description
Setpoint limitation
p1080[D] Minimum speed
p1082[D] Maximum speed
p1083[D] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation
r1084 Speed limit positive effective
p1085[C] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation
p1086[D] CO: Speed limit negative direction of rotation
r1087 Speed limit negative effective
p1088[C] DI: Speed limit negative direction of rotation
r1119 Ramp function generator setpoint at the input
Suppression bandwidths
p1091[D] ... p1094[D] Suppression speed 1 to suppression speed 4
p1101[D] Suppression speed bandwidth
Description
The ramp function generator is used to limit acceleration in the event of abrupt setpoint
changes, which helps prevent load surges throughout the drive train. The ramp-up time
p1120[DDS] and ramp-down time p1121[DDS] can be used to set an acceleration ramp and
a deceleration ramp independently of each other. This allows a controlled transition to be
made in the event of setpoint changes.
The maximum speed p1082[DDS] is used as a reference value for calculating the ramps
from the ramp-up and ramp-down times. A special adjustable ramp can be set via p1135 for
fast stop (OFF3), e.g. for rapid controlled deceleration when an emergency stop button is
pressed.
There are two types of ramp function generator:
● Simple ramp function generator with
– Acceleration and deceleration ramps
– Ramp for fast stop (OFF3)
– Tracking can be selected via a binector input
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
226 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Note
The ramp function generator cannot be frozen (via p1141) in jog mode (r0046.31 = 1).
[
7XS 7GQ
S
W
S
\
S
W
S
7XS 7GQ
Figure 6-10 Ramp-up and ramp-down with the simple ramp function generator
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 227
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
S
[
\
S
G\GW ,5 )5 ,5 )5 ,5 )5 ,5 )5
W
7XSBHII 7GQBHII
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
228 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
ZLWKRXWWUDFNLQJ ZLWKWUDFNLQJ
S
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
W W W W
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 229
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters Description
Adjustable parameters
p1115 Ramp function generator selection
p1120[DDS] Ramp function generator ramp-up time
p1121[DDS] Ramp function generator ramp-down time
p1122[CDS] BI: Bypass ramp function generator
p1130[DDS] Ramp function generator initial rounding time
p1131[DDS] Ramp function generator final rounding time
p1134[DDS] Ramp function generator rounding type
p1135[DDS] OFF3 ramp-down time
p1136[DDS] OFF3 initial rounding time
p1137[DDS] OFF3 final rounding time
p1140[CDS] BI: Enable ramp generator
p1141[CDS] BI: Start ramp function generator
p1143[CDS] BI: Ramp function generator, accept setting value
p1144[CDS] CI: Ramp function generator setting value
p1145[DDS] Ramp function generator tracking
p1148 [DDS] Ramp function generator tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active
p1151 [DDS] Ramp function generator configuration
Display parameters
r1119 CO: Ramp function generator setpoint at the input
p1149 Ramp function generator acceleration
r1150 CO: Ramp function generator speed setpoint at the output
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
230 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.2.1 Description
Both closed-loop control procedures with and without a sensor (VC, SLVC) have the same
speed controller structure, which contains the following components:
● PI controller
● Speed controller pre-control
● Droop function
The total of the output variables result in the torque setpoint, which is reduced to the
permissible magnitude by means of the torque setpoint limitation.
Speed controller
The speed controller receives its setpoint (r0062) from the setpoint channel and its actual
value (r0063) either directly from the speed sensor (control with sensor (VC)) or indirectly via
the motor model (control without sensor (SLVC)). The system deviation is increased by the
PI controller and, in conjunction with the pre-control, results in the torque setpoint.
When the load torque increases, the speed setpoint is reduced proportionately when droop
is active, which means that the single drive within a group (two or more mechanically
connected motors) is relieved when the torque becomes too great.
'URRS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ U
U
3UH
FRQWURO
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 231
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Note
In comparison with speed control with a sensor, the dynamic response of drives without a
sensor is significantly reduced. The actual speed is derived by means of a model calculation
from the converter output variables for current and voltage that have a corresponding
interference level. To this end, the actual speed must be adjusted by means of filter
algorithms in the software.
Parameter Description
p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation, control parameters
p1442[0...n] Speed actual value smoothing time
p1452[0...n] Speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC)
p1460[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower
p1462[0...n] Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed, lower
p1470[0...n] Speed controller sensorless operation P gain
p1472[0...n] Speed controller sensorless operation integral time
p1960 Speed controller optimization selection
r0062 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter
r0063[0...1] CO: Speed actual value
r0345[0...n] Rated motor start-up time
r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output
r1508 CO Torque setpoint before supplementary torque
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
232 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Description
Two adaptation methods are available, namely free Kp_n adaptation and speed-dependent
Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation.
Free Kp_n adaptation can also also be activated in "operation without sensor" mode and is
used in "operation with sensor" mode as an additional factor for speed-dependent Kp_n
adaptation.
The speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n-adaptation is only active during "operation with sensor".
S
S
$GDSWDWLRQVLJQDO \
S [
UHIHUUHGWR
S[RUS[ [
S S
S
6SHHGGHSHQGHQW
S
7QBQDGDSWDWLRQ
7QBQBDGDSW
Dynamic response reduction in the field-weakening range can be activated (p1400.0) with
sensorless operation. This is activated when the speed controller is optimized in order to
achieve a greater dynamic response in the basic speed range.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 233
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Note
This type of adaptation is only active in "operation with sensor" mode.
.SBQ 3URSRUWLRQDOJDLQ
7QBQ ,QWHJUDODFWLRQWLPH
S[S
S
.SBQ
ZLWKDGDSWDWLRQ
S[S
ZLWKRXWDGDSWDWLRQ
S
7QBQ
Q
S S
&RQVWDQWORZHUVSHHGUDQJH QS
$GDSWDWLRQUDQJH SQS
&RQVWDQWXSSHUVSHHGUDQJH Q!S
Parameterization
In the STARTER commissioning tool, the "Speed controller" parameter screen is selected
with the icon in the toolbar:
Parameter Description
s
p1400.5 Speed control configuration: Kp/Tn adaptation active
p1470 Speed controller sensorless operation P-gain
p1472 Speed controller sensorless operation integral action time
Free Kp_n adaptation
p1455 CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
234 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter Description
s
p1456 Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point
p1457 Speed amplifier P gain adaptation upper starting point
p1458 Adaptation factor lower
p1459 Adaptation factor upper
p1466 CI: Speed controller P gain scaling
Speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation (VC only)
p1460 Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower
p1461 Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, upper
p1462 Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed, lower
p1463 Speed controller integral time adaptation speed, upper
p1464 Speed controller adaptation speed, lower
p1465 Speed controller adaptation speed, upper
Dynamic response reduction field weakening (SLVC only)
p1400.0 Speed control configuration: Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 235
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
'URRS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
S $FFHOHUDWLRQSUHFRQWURO
S S U
S U
.S 7Q
S
S S
U 3, U U
6SHHG U>@
! FRQWUROOHU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW 7RUTXH
7L VHWSRLQW
U>@ U
7L .S 7Q
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
6/9& S S S
7L 9& S S S
RQO\HIIHFWLYHLIS
RQO\HIIHFWLYHLIS
If the speed controller has been correctly adjusted, it only has to compensate for disturbance
variables in its own control loop, which can be achieved by means of a relatively small
change to the correcting variables. Speed setpoint changes, on the other hand, are carried
out without involving the speed controller and are, therefore, performed more quickly.
The effect of the pre-control variable can be adapted according to the application via the
evaluation factor p1496. If p1496 = 100 %, pre-control is calculated in accordance with the
motor and load moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). A balancing filter is used automatically to
prevent the speed controller from acting against the injected torque setpoint. The time
constant of the balancing filter corresponds to the equivalent delay time of the speed control
loop. Speed controller pre-control is correctly set (p1496 = 100%, calibration via p0342)
when the I component of the speed controller (r1482) does not change during a ramp-up or
ramp-down in the range n > 20% x p0310. Thus, the pre-control allows a new speed setpoint
to be approached without overshoot (prerequisite: the torque limiting does not act and the
moment of inertia remains constant).
If the speed controller is pre-controlled through injection, the speed setpoint (r0062) is
delayed with the same smoothing time (p1442 or p1452) as the actual value (r1445). This
ensures that no target/actual difference (r0064) occurs at the controller input during
acceleration, which would be attributable solely to the signal propagation time.
When speed pre-control is activated, the speed setpoint must be specified continuously or
without a higher interference level (avoids sudden torque changes). An appropriate signal
can be generated by smoothing the speed setpoint or activating the ramp function generator
rounding p1130 – p1131.
The starting time r0345 (Tstart) is a measure for the total moment of inertia J of the machine
and describes the time during which the unloaded drive can be accelerated with the rated
motor torque r0333 (Mmot,rated) from standstill to the rated motor speed p0311 (nmot,rated).
U 7$QODXI -
˭ Q0RWQHQQ
S S
˭ S
00RWQHQQ U
If these basic conditions are in line with the application, the starting time can be used as the
lowest value for the ramp-up or ramp-down time.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
236 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Note
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120; p1121) of the ramp function generator in the
setpoint channel should be set accordingly so that the motor speed can track the setpoint
during acceleration and braking. This ensures that speed controller pre-control is functioning
optimally.
The acceleration pre-control using a connector input (p1495) is activated by the parameter
settings p1400.2 = 1 and p1400.3 = 0. p1428 (dead time) and p1429 (time constant) can be
set for balancing purposes.
Reference model
'URRS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
5HIHUHQFHPRGHOVSHHGFRQWURO
S S
U S
.S 7Q
U
S ,
U 3, U U
6SHHG U>@
3 FRQWUROOHU
7RUTXH
6SHHG VHWSRLQW
VHWSRLQW U>@ U
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 237
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters Description
p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed
r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque
p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia
p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia
r0345[0...n] Rated motor start-up time
p1400.2[0...n] Acceleration pre-control source
p1428[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing dead time
p1429[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing time constant
p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling
r1518 CO: Accelerating torque
For reference model
p1400.3[0...n] Reference model speed setpoint I component
p1433[0...n] Speed controller reference model natural frequency
p1434[0...n] Speed controller reference model damping
p1435[0...n] Speed controller reference model dead time
r1436 CO: Speed controller reference model speed setpoint output
p1437[0...n] CI: Speed controller reference model I component input
Description
Droop (enabled via p1492) ensures that the speed setpoint is reduced proportionally as the
load torque increases.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
238 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
S
'URRSFRPSHQVDWLRQ
S
U PV
U
U
S
3UH
FRQWURO .S 7Q
U
3, U
U>@ U
6SHHG
6SHHGVHWSRLQW FRQWUROOHU
U
7L 7RUTXH
U>@ U
VHWSRLQW
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
7L .S 7Q
The droop function has a torque limiting effect on a drive that is mechanically coupled to a
different speed (e.g. guide roller on a goods train). In this way, a very effective load
distribution can also be realized in connection with the torque setpoint of a leading speed-
controlled drive. In contrast to torque control or load distribution with overriding and
limitation, with the appropriate setting, such a load distribution controls even a smooth
mechanical connection or the case of slipping.
This method is only suitable to a limited extent for drives that are accelerated and braked
with significant changes in speed.
The droop feedback is used, for example, in applications in which two or more motors are
connected mechanically or operate with a common shaft and fulfill the above requirements. It
limits the torque differences that can occur as a result of the mechanical connection between
the motors by modifying the speeds of the individual motors (drive is relieved when the
torque becomes too great).
Prerequisites
● All connected drives must be operated with vector control and speed control (with or
without a sensor).
● Only a single common ramp function generator may be used for mechanically coupled
drives.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 239
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters Description
p1488[0...n] Droop input source
p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling
p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable
r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output
r1490 CO: Droop feedback speed reduction
Description
With sensorless speed control SLVC (p1300 = 20) or speed control with sensor VC (p1300 =
21), a switchover can be made to torque control (slave drive) via BICO parameter p1501. A
switchover cannot be made between speed and torque control if torque control is selected
directly with p1300 = 22 or 23. The torque setpoint and/or supplementary setpoint can be
entered using BICO parameter p1503 (CI: torque setpoint) or p1511 (CI: supplementary
torque setpoint). The supplementary torque is active both with torque and speed control.
This particular feature with the supplementary torque setpoint allows a pre-control torque to
be applied for speed control.
Note
For safety reasons, connecting to fixed torque setpoints is currently not possible.
Regenerative energy may accumulate, and this must be either fed back into the supply
system or converted into heat using a braking resistor.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
240 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Kp Tn
3,
VSHHG r1538 r0079
r1547[0]
Speed setpoint - FRQWUROOHU 0
Ti
1 Torque setpoint
r1547[1] r1539
Speed actual value
M_soll
p1503[C]
(0)
p1300 = M Reg
p1501 1=M_reg active ุ1
[FP2520.7] r1406.12 r1407.2
M_Zusatz 1 r1515
p1511[C]
(0)
M_Zusatz 1 Scal
M_Zusatz 2 Scal
p1512[C]
-2 000%...2 000%
(0)
p1514 [D] (100.0%)
M_Zusatz 2
p1513[C]
(0)
The total of the two torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the speed control torque
setpoint. Above the maximum speed (p1082), a speed limiting controller reduces the torque
limits in order to prevent the drive from accelerating any further.
True torque control (with self-adjusting speed) is only possible in closed-loop but not open-
loop control for sensorless vector control (SLVC). In open-loop control, the torque setpoint
adjusts the setpoint speed via a ramp function generator (integration time ~ p1499 x p0341 x
p0342). For this reason, sensorless torque control at standstill is only suitable for
applications that require an accelerating torque but no load torque (e.g. traction drives). This
restriction does not apply to torque control with sensor.
OFF responses
● OFF1 and p1300 = 22, 23
– Reaction as for OFF2
● OFF2
– Immediate pulse suppression, the drive coasts to standstill.
– Power-on disable is activated.
● OFF3
– Switch to speed-controlled operation
– n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3 deceleration ramp
(p1135).
– The pulses are deleted at the end of the deceleration ramp or after a certain time (X x
ramp down time) has elapsed. Standstill is detected when the actual speed value is
less than the speed threshold (p1226) or when the monitoring time (p1227) that
started when speed setpoint ≤ speed threshold (p1226) has expired.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 241
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters Description
p0341 Motor moment of inertia
p0342 Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia
p1300 Open-loop/closed-loop control mode
p1499 Accelerating for torque control, scaling
p1501 BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control
p1503 CI: Torque setpoint
p1511 CI: Supplementary torque 1
p1512 CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling
p1513 CI: Supplementary torque 2
p1514 Supplementary torque 2 scaling
r1515 Supplementary torque total
Description
S U
7RUTXH
S OLPLWV U
0LQ U
U
S
&XUUHQWOLPLW
U
0D[ U
S
3RZHU
S OLPLWV
The value specifies the maximum permissible torque whereby different limits can be
configured for motor and regenerative mode.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
242 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters Description
p0640[0...n] Current limit
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit, upper/motoring
p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit, lower/regenerative
p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit, upper/motoring
p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit, lower/regenerative
p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit, upper/motoring, scaling
p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit, lower/regenerating scaling
p1530[0...n] Power limit, motoring
p1531[0...n] Power limit, regenerating
The currently active torque limit values are displayed in the following parameters:
Parameters Description
r0067 Maximum drive output current
r1526 Torque limit, upper/motoring without offset
r1527 Torque limit, lower/regenerative without offset
The following limits all apply to the torque setpoint, which is present either at the speed
controller output in the case of speed control, or at the torque input in the case of torque
control. The minimum/maximum value of the different limits is used in each case.
The minimum value is calculated cyclically and displayed in parameters r1538 and r1539.
Parameters Description
r1538 CO: Upper effective torque limit
r1539 CO: Lower effective torque limit
These cyclical values therefore limit the torque setpoint at the speed controller output/torque
input or indicate the instantaneous max. possible torque. If the torque setpoint is limited in
the motor module, this is indicated via the following diagnostic parameters:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 243
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters Description
r1407.8 Upper torque limit active
r1407.9 Lower torque limit active
Description
The two current setpoint filters connected in series can be configured as follows:
● Low-pass 2nd order (PT2): -40 dB/decade)
● General 2nd-order filter
STARTER converts band-stop and low-pass with reduction in the parameters of the
general 2nd order filter.
– Bandstop
– Low-pass with reduction by a constant value
The phase frequency curve is shown alongside the amplitude log frequency curve. A
phase shift results in a control system delay and should be kept to a minimum.
Parameter Function
s
p1655 CI: Current setpoint filter natural frequency tuning
... ...
p1666 Current setpoint filter 2 numerator damping
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
244 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Description
The default setting for the current controller is automatically derived from the motor data and
is usually adequate for most applications.
Ensure that the current controller is only optimized if:
● the rating plate data are not completely known or autoidentification has not taken place
correctly. This means that no accurate motor data are available.
● the motor has shut down due to overcurrent or current fluctuations.
● the speed fluctuates (if the current controller is too slow, for example).
● the dynamics of the current/speed controller do not appear adequate for the process.
In this case, select operating mode l/f (p1300 = 18) to optimize the following current
controller parameters with the aid of step responses:
● p1715 Current controller gain
● p1717 Current controller integral-time
For this purpose, record parameters r0075 and r0076 with the trace. The current setpoint
can be specified as a percentage of the rated motor current using p6890.
Note
If major adjustment of the current controller is unexpectedly necessary, this indicates that the
motor data was wrong or that there is severe non-linearity of the inductance (saturation). If
this is the case it is essential to check the motor and series reactor data.
If there is strong saturation then the current controller must not be set too rigidly. The
controller needs to be optimized to the inductance at the working point.
If the d/q axis of the motor is asymmetric (only for PEM) the current controller setting should
adjust to the axis with the lower inductance. Otherwise the other axis may become unstable.
If the converter has a sine-wave output filter then poorly dampened harmonic oscillations or
even shutdowns due to overcurrent may result. In this case, reduce the gain.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 245
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Description
9GFBUHJ7Q
9GFBPD[ S
9GFBUHJ.S 9GFBUHJWBUDWHBDFWLRQ
S S
9GFBPD[(LQBSHJ 9GFBUHJFRQILJ
U S
9GFBDFW ದ
&RQWURO=6:
U
U
U
9GFBUHJBRXWSXW
9GFBPD[G\QBIDFWRU U
S
,TBVHW
/LPLWDWLRQ
9GFBUHJ7Q
S
9GFBUHJWB
9GFBUHJ.S UDWHBDFWLRQ
S S
9GFBPLQ(LQBSHJ 9GFBUHJFRQILJ
U S
9GFBDFW
&RQWURO=6:
U
ದ U
U
9GFBPLQ
9GFBPLQG\QBIDFWRU
S
The "Vdc control" function can be activated using the appropriate measures if an overvoltage
or undervoltage is present in the DC link.
● Overvoltage in the DC link
– Typical cause
The drive is operating in regenerative mode and is supplying too much energy to the
DC link.
– Remedy
Reduce the regenerative torque to maintain the DC link voltage within permissible
limits. With the Vdc controller activated, the converter may automatically extend the
ramp down time of a drive if the shutdown supplies too much energy to the DC link.
● Undervoltage in the DC link
– Typical cause
Failure of the supply voltage or supply for the DC link.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
246 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
– Remedy
Specify a regenerative torque for the rotating drive to compensate the existing losses,
thereby stabilizing the voltage in the DC link (kinetic buffering).
Properties
● Vdc control
– This comprises Vdc_max control and Vdc_min control (kinetic buffering), which are
independent of each other.
– Joint PI controller. The dynamic factor is used to set Vdc_min and Vdc_max control
independently of each other.
● Vdc_max control
– This function can be used to control momentary regenerative load without shutdown
using “overvoltage in the DC link“.
– Vdc_max control is only recommended with a supply without active closed-loop control
for the DC link and without feedback.
● Vdc_min control (kinetic buffering)
– With this function, the kinetic energy of the motor is used for buffering the DC link
voltage in the event of a momentary power failure, thereby delaying the drive.
3RZHUIDLOXUH 3RZHUUHVWRUH
U
ZLWKRXW.,3IDXOW)
9
W
9GFFRQWUROOHU
DFWLYH
W
QVHW
ZLWKRXWSRZHUUHVWRUHIDXOW)
USP
7SRZHUBIDLO W
W
,TVHW
PRWRUL]HG
$
UHJHQHUDWLYH
In the event of a power failure, Vdc_min control is activated when the Vdc_min switch-in level
is undershot. This controls the DC link voltage and maintains it at a constant level. The motor
speed is reduced.
When the power supply is restored, the DC link voltage increases again and Vdc_min control
is deactivated at 5 % above the Vdc_min switch-on level. The motor continues operating
normally.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 247
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
If the power supply is not reestablished, the motor speed continues to drop. When the
threshold in p1257 is reached, this results in a response in accordance with p1256.
Once the time threshold (p1255) has elapsed without the line voltage being reestablished, a
fault is triggered (F07406), which can be parameterized as required (factory setting: OFF3).
The Vdc_min controller can be activated for a drive. Other drives can participate in
supporting the DC link, by transferring a scaling of their speed setpoint from the controlling
drive via BICO interconnection.
Note
Ensure that the converter is not disconnected from the line supply. It could become
disconnected if, for example, a circuit breaker drops out.
W
9GFFRQWUROOHUDFWLYH
W
_Q_
QDFW
QVHW
W
,TVHW
$
,TVHW 7RUTXHJHQHUDWLQJFXUUHQWVHWSRLQW
Note
The crowbar is fired at 1.23 times the rated DC-link voltage
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
248 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter Description
p1240[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (control)
p1241[0...n] Vdc controller switch-in level [% of p210] (control)
r1242 Vdc_max controller switch-in level
p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (control)
p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (control)
r1246 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (control)
p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (control)
p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold (control)
p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (control)
p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (control)
p1252[0...n] Vdc controller derivative time (control)
p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time step (control)
p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (control)
p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (control)
r1258 CO: Vdc controller output (control)
Description
The ability to add a machine on the fly is controlled using parameter P1200 (flying restart on
= 1/off = 0). If flying restart is off (default setting) then the drive always starts with a
frequency of zero. If it is turning nevertheless then overcurrents may result.
NOTICE
Under certain conditions during encoderless operation there may be a delay between the
command to enable operation and operation itself. This occurs when
• the drive is operating without an encoder
• the flying restart function is active
• the motor terminals are temporarily disconnected from the converter by a switch.
In this case, the closed-loop control loses the voltage and speed information and must re-
synchronize itself. This process may take up to 30 seconds.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 249
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Residual tacho
If operating without a rotary transducer, the speed is estimated from the motor voltages.
Since these voltages can be very low and reduce with reducing speed there is a minimum
speed for each motor, from which the speed is displayed as zero.
● P6702[0] Lower standstill threshold (default = 2% of rated motor speed)
● P6702[1] Upper standstill threshold (default = 3% of rated motor speed)
NOTICE
These thresholds affect the flying restart function and should only be changed if
problems are encountered when adding drives at low speeds.
Description
The automatic restart (WEA) starts the drive/drive group automatically when power is
restored after a power failure. All faults are automatically acknowledged and the drive is
powered-up again. This function is not only restricted to line supply faults; it can also be used
to automatically acknowledge faults and to restart the motor after any fault trips. The "flying
restart" function is activated internally so that the drive can be connected to a rotating motor
shaft.
WARNING
Death, serious injury or material damage can result if motors start up unexpectedly.
If p1210 is set to a value > 1, the motors can start automatically once the power supply has
been restored. This is especially critical, if, after longer line supply failures, motors come to
a standstill (zero speed) and it is incorrectly assumed that they have been powered-down.
Ensure that the motor cannot start unexpectedly.
Note
The converter may optionally be fitted with the VSM 10 line voltage sensing module (Option
L32) in order to safely detect the return of the power supply after a power failure of any
duration and restore operational readiness.
The VSM10 is always assigned to the DO of the infeed, i.e. DFEMV. The automatic restart
itself is in the DO VECTORMV.
An uninterruptible power supply (Option L53) must be used if the converter is to restart
automatically after failure of the electronics power supply.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
250 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Note
The special case described here is not a WEA operating mode in the true sense (in which
error messages are acknowledged). However, in its external functionality it acts in exactly
the same way as the WEA for short power failures. Its particular advantage is its rapid
operational readiness after power is restored. The time taken to reach the load torque is
determined principally by the duration of the "Flying Restart".
The "Hot Standby" is activated when a power failure causes the DC link voltage to fall below
the PSA shutdown threshold (pulse block) but the LS remains connected.
Pre-charge Pre-charge
of i/c of i/c
,QWHUPHGLDWHFLUFXLWYROWDJHDVRIUDWHGYROWDJH
Pulse block Charging of i/c Power restore
initiated by by pre-charge
FPGA
7LPHD[LV
This diagram explains its function. The power supply may be restored at any time.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 251
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
5HGXFWLRQLQLF
YROWDJHZLWKOLQH
FRQWDFWRUIDXOW 5HGXFWLRQLQLF 5HGXFWLRQLQLF
VKXWGRZQ YROWDJHSUH YROWDJHSUH 5HGXFWLRQLQLF
FKDUJHRII FKDUJHRII YROWDJHDV
UHVXOWRISRZHU
UHVWRUH
&RQQHFWLQJ
WKHOLQHFRQWDFWRU
3UHFKDUJLQJ 3UHFKDUJLQJ
WKHLF WKHLF
,QWHUPHGLDWHFLUFXLWYROWDJHDVRIUDWHGYROWDJH
:($HQGHG
:($EHFRPHVDFWLYH
$IWHU
IDXOWVKXWGRZQ
~
~
7LPHD[LV
Figure 6-25 DC link voltage after fault shutdown with active WEA.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
252 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Note
This delay time is dependent on the VSM on the infeed, as follows:
• Without VSM: When the automatic restart (WEA) is active, all the faults present are
automatically acknowledged after this delay time and the ON command is generated
internally.
• With VSM: When the automatic restart (WEA) is active, the system waits for the power
supply to return after this delay period within the time set in p1213 (when p1213=0, the
system waits an unlimited time for the power supply to return). When Bl: p1208 = 0/1
signal (power supply OK) all faults present are automatically acknowledged and the ON
command is generated internally.
The start attempt is successful if flying restart of the engine has been completed (r0056.4 =
1) and a further 10 seconds have expired.
If further faults occur between successful acknowledgement and the end of the startup
attempt, the WEA is interrupted.
Startup
1. Activate the function for drive object vector and infeed.
2. Set the WEA mode (p1210)
3. If necessary, set the BICOs (p1208)
4. Set the delay times (p1212, p1213)
5. Check the function.
Parameters Description
r6530 Power supply status
p1208 BI Automatic restart control word
r0046 Missing enable signals
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 253
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters Description
p1210 Automatic restart mode
p1212 Automatic restart, delay time start attempts
p1213 Automatic restart, monitoring time line supply return
p1214 Automatic restart status word
Signaling
Automatic restart is indicated by alarm message A07321 "Drive: Automatic restart active".
A digital output signal must also be provided to indicate the beginning of the restart e.g.
optically by a warning light or acoustically by a buzzer.
The alarm message on restart is only generated if the motor is (almost) stationary, threshold:
100 rpm.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
254 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
+RW6WDQG%\ +6%\LVDFWLYHZKHQS
$,1,7
$Q\6WDWH ,QLWLDOL]DWLRQ
7KHFRPPLVVLRQLQJLVEHLQJ
3 25 H[HFXWHG,QYHUQDOYDULDEOH
2)) 25
2)) 25 LQLWLDOL]DWLRQ
2)) 25 3
3
3UHFKDUJHFRQWURO
&RPPLVVLRQLQJUHDG\
$FWLYDWHSUHFKDUJHLQ
ಱWZRSRLQWFRQWUROPRGHಯ
ZKHQ3
&,'/( 0DGHZLWKKHOSRI%,&2
3 25
2)) 25 :DLWIRUಯ2QFRPPDQGರDQG
2)) 25 ZDLWIRUHUURU
2)) 25
3 $5)UHVWDUWVWKHGULYHRQO\
LI$5)LVDFWLYH$1'DQ
HUURULVDFWLYH$1'DQ2Q 3UHFKDUJH
FRPPDQG 3
3
3
$ODUP$FN
3
3 $FNQRZOHGJH$ODUPV
ZKHQS
3! $1' ,PSOHPHQWHGZLWK
8'&8QGHUYROWDJH LQWHUQDOFRQQHFWLRQVDQG
3 $1'
)DFWLYH ZLWK%,&2
$Q\DFWLYHHUURUS$1' $WOHDVWRQHHUURUSUHVHQWV
3
&RGH
$OKKDQGOHU
3
-+6%<:$,7
&RGH &RGH
3>@ :DLWIRUVLJQDO
ಯ6XS6HT5HDG\ರLWUHSRUWV :DUQLQJ
3
WKHJULGYROWDJHLVW2.
*ULGYROWDJH2. SXOVHVFRXOGEHUHHQDEOHG
3 6HWVLJQDOಱ'ULYHZLOO
7LPHUS6WDUW DXWRPDWLFDOO\UHVWDUWಯ
*:$,73 ZKHQWLPHUUXQV
VWDUWWLPHUE\UHTXHVW$1' DQGZKHQ3
ZKHQS *ULGYROWDJH2.
:DLWEHIRUHHUURUFOHDU
VWRSWLPHUZKHQ$5)LQ
WLPHGHWHUPLQHGE\S
,'/(VWDWHLV
6WDUWWLPHS
3
70
7LPHURYHUIORZ ,36$48,7
WLPHURYHUIORZ
&RGH
*HQHUDWHVTXLWFRPPDQG 0RWRU6HT
RQO\IRU36$WRH[LWIURP
SXOVHGLVDEOHGVWDWH 6XSSUHVVHUURU)LI
3 +RW6WDQG%\UXQV
ZLWKRXW960 ZLWK960 3
0RGLI\FRGH
'RQRWUHVWDUWWLPHU
&RGH
$WOHDVWRQHHUURUSUHVHQWV
'$&.)$8/7
(UURUFOHDUVWDWH
3
$FNDOOHUURUV
$WOHDVWRQHHUURU
SUHVHQWV
&RGH
1RHUURU
$WOHDVWRQHQHZ
($5))$8/7 HUURUSUHVHQWV
&RGH
6HW(UURU)DGGLWLRQDO
LQIR &RGH
6WRSWLPHUS 1RHUURU
3 $WOHDVWRQHQHZ
HUURUSUHVHQWV
)*(121&0'
&RGH
2QFRPPDQGJHQHUDWLRQ
)LVDFNQRZOHGJHGE\XVHU
IRU0RWRU6HTXHQFHU
3
5HPDLQLQJYDOXHRIWLPHU33
&RGH
6XSSO\6HTUHDG\
+:$51,1*
:DUQLQJIRUXVHUಯ'ULYHZLOO
DXWRPDWLFDOO\UHVWDUWರ
6WDUWWLPHS DFWLYDWH
3
$WOHDVWRQHQHZHUURU
SUHVHQWV 3
&RGH )O\UHVWDUWFRQWURO
3 25
7LPHUWLPHRXW25
6WDUWಯIO\UHVWDUWIXQFWLRQರE\
6WRSWLPHUS 3 25 0RWRUVSHHG3!WXUQPLQ UHTXHVW6WRSLWZKHQWKH
7LPHUWLPHRXW25 SXOVHVDUHHQDEOHG$1'
0RWRUVSHHG3!WXUQPLQ +RW6WDQG%\LVLQDFWLYH
(QDEOHSXOVHV
)O\UHVWDUW
.021,725
0RWRUVHT
:DLWLQJDVKRUWWLPH
VHFWREHVXUHWKHGULYH
UXQVZLWKRXWHUURUWKH
UHVWDUWZDVVXFFHVIXOO
3
7LPHUWLPHRXW
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 255
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Description
The bypass function "Synchronization with overlapping" can be used during vector control
and with induction motors without encoders.
It functions as a controller of two circuit breakers via digital outputs of the converter and
evaluates the check-back signals of the circuit-breakers via digital inputs (e.g. via TM15).
This circuit allows the motor to be operated using the converter or directly on the supply line.
The circuit breakers are activated by the converter. The check-back signals for the circuit
breaker positions have to be returned to the converter.
When the bypass function (parameter p1260=1) is activated, the motor is synchronized and
transferred to the power system and then retrieved. During the changeover, both circuit
breakers K1 and K2 are closed at the same time for a period (phase lock synchronization). A
throttle is used to uncouple the converter voltage and power system voltage, the uk value for
the throttle is 10 % +/- 2 %.
. .
0
ɫ
Figure 6-27 Connection example for bypass
The bypass is also shut down when one of the "OFF2" or "OFF3" control word signals is
canceled.
Exception to this:
● The bypass switch can be locked as needed by a higher-level controller in such a manner
that the converter can be completely (i.e. including the control electronics) shutdown
while the motor is driven on the power system. The circuit breaker locking must be carried
out on the system side.
● When a converter is restarted after POWER OFF, the status of the bypass circuit breaker
is evaluated. This allows the converter to switch directly to "ready to switch on" mode
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
256 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
after powering up. This is only possible if the bypass is activated via a control signal and
the control signal (p1266) is still on after the power up.
● A change of the converter into "ready to switch on and bypass" mode after power up has
a higher priority than the automatic restart.
● The two motor switches must be designed for switching under load.
Requirements
The bypass function is only possible during encoder-less speed control (p1300 = 20) and
with the use of an induction motor.
For synchronization with over-lapping, a VSM10 must be used.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 257
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Via parameter p0108.16, you can check whether the technology controller function module
has been successfully activated (2).
In addition, macro 1582 must be executed in parameter p0015 for the bypass option (p0015
= 1582).
Example:
After the bypass function with synchronization with over-lapping (p1260 = 1) is activated, the
following parameters must also be set:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
258 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter Description
p1266 = Setting the control signal source
p1269[0] = Signal source for the ON check-back signal of contactor K1
p1269[1] = Signal source for the ON check-back signal of contactor K2
p3800 = 1 For synchronization, the internal voltages are used.
p3801 = 2 Syc-network drive drive object number
P6674[1] Settings and interface K1
...
p6689[1]
P6674[2] Settings and interface K2
...
p6689[2]
SE\SDVVFRPPDQG
U
6\QFKURQL]DWLRQUHTXHVWHG
E\E\SDVVIXQFWLRQ
U
6\QFKURQLVPDFKLHYHG
U
&ORVHFRQWDFWRU.
S
&RQWDFWRU.FORVHG
U
&ORVHFRQWDFWRU.
S
&RQWDFWRU.FORVHG
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 259
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
● After the motor has been successfully synchronized to the line frequency, line voltage
and line phase, the synchronizing algorithm reports this status (r3819.2).
● The bypass mechanism evaluates this signal and closes switch K2 (r1261.1 = 1).
● Once switch K2 has reported "closed" status (r1269[1] = 1), switch K1 is opened and the
converter blocks the pulse. The converter is in “Ready to Operate and bypass” state.
● If the ON command in this phase is taken away, the converter changes to the basic
"Ready to Switch On" status. The converter is separated from the line and the DC circuit
is discharged.
Parameter Description
Bypass function
p1260 Bypass configuration
r1261 CO/BO: CO/BO: Bypass control/status word
p1266 BI: BI: Bypass control signal
p1268 BI: Bypass check-back signal synchronization completed
p1269 BI: Bypass switch check-back signal source
Synchronization
p3800 Sync network drive activation
p3801 Sync network drive drive object number
p3802 BI: Sync network drive enable
r3803t CO/BO: Sync network drive control word
r3804 CO: Sync network drive target frequency
r3805 CO: Sync network drive frequency difference
p3806 Sync network drive frequency difference threshold value
r3808 CO: Sync network drive phase difference
p3809 Sync network drive phase setpoint value
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
260 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter Description
p3811 Sync network drive frequency limitation
r3812 CO: Sync network drive correction frequency
p3813 Sync network drive phase synchronism threshold value
r3814 CO: Sync network drive voltage difference
p3815 Sync network drive voltage difference threshold value
r3819 CO/BO: Sync network drive status word
P6670[1]...p6690[1] Switch 1
P6670[2]...p6690[2] Switch 2
Introduction
The bypass control is used in so-called "staging" applications.
Description
With staging, the flow rate of a pump station, for example, is divided among several motors.
All the motors can either be at rest, be controlled at the converter or run strictly on the infeed
line. There is only one converter for the entire system.
To set the flow rate, the required number of motors are powered up and switched to the line
using the bypass function. An additional motor can operate continuously on the converter
and it can stagelessly regulate the flow rate. If more output is required than the regulated
motor can deliver, it is connected to the line via the bypass function and an additional motor
is started using the now available converter. Conversely, the output can be reduced by
stopping the regulated motor and retrieving a line-driven motor, which is then regulated.
External control
For the required switching procedures, one line-side bypass switch and one converter-side
bypass switch is required for each motor. The switch-over between the individual motors is
coordinated by an external controller. Just as for a normal bypass, the converter detects only
one motor and controls its line-side and converter-side bypass switch.
The external controller's task is:
● To connect to the converter the control and check-back signal of the two switches of the
motor that is currently supposed to be operated with the converter.
● To keep the other motors in "Off" or "line mode" status.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 261
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6LJQDOOLQHVIRUVZLWFKDFWLYDWLRQGLVSOD\HGLQVLPSOLILHGIRUP
6XSSO\V\VWHP
3URWHFWLYHHTXLSPHQW
&RQYHUWHUZLWK960
. .
5HDFWRU
%XVEDU
* * * *
0 0 0 0
There is a staging signal, which makes it possible to switch motors without operating the line
switch (staging without staging command).
Function Principle
The external controller connects the first motor with the converter to the line. Then it must
lock the line-side bypass switch in the "ON" status and completely shut down the converter.
Now the external controller can switch the control signals and feedback signals of the
switches to a different motor and switch on the converter again.
This motor can run in bypass or sit idle, because the converter firmware detects the status
when ramping up and its sequence control starts accordingly. The only prerequisite is that
the status must agree with the bypass setpoint command, otherwise a fault occurs.
The disadvantage of this however is that the converter must be completely shutdown during
each motor change, which can lead to very long change-over times and unnecessary wear
of the infeed switch, especially for large converters. To fulfill the requirements of staging, a
motor change must be possible in "ready for operation and bypass" status.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
262 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Introduction
To preclude the disadvantages of "staging without a staging command," staging command
BI p2369 is initiated. It has the following characteristics.
Characteristics
● When the staging signal arrives, K1 is opened and the pulses are disabled.
● As long as the staging signal remains pending, the monitoring systems of the bypass
switch check-back signals in the circuit-breaker control module are frozen (i.e., check-
back signal "ON/OFF" is set internally as per the "ON/OFF" command, and all other
check-back signals are set internally to High.)
● When the staging signal arrives, the "check" status is forced in the bypass sequencer.
This check reads the check-back signals of the bypass switches and compares them with
the bypass command (you can find more detailed information in the Section "Arrival of
Staging-signal").
Principle of operation
. .
0
ɫ
Figure 6-32 Connection example for bypass
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 263
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
NOTICE
Should the staging switch-over procedure run in an uncoordinated way (e.g. K2 is closed by
the converter without the motor turning), the motor is firmly switched to the medium voltage
line.
If the over-current protection of K2 is not correctly set, the converter or the motor can
become damaged.
Ensure therefore that the over-current protection is correctly set.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
264 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Initial state
For a motor change, the external controller must adhere to the following sequence. As an
example (switch designation), a change from motor 1 to motor 2 is described:
Initial state: The converter is switched on (STW1.0 = 1) or in the
● ready to operate status, then K11 is closed and K21 is opened. The motor is at rest,
p1266 = 0
. .
67$*,1*
. .
0 0
or
● status ready to operate and bypass, then K11 is opened and K21 is closed. The motor 1
is running in bypass, p1266 = 1.
. .
67$*,1*
. .
0 0
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 265
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Procedure
✔ Lock the controller K21 in the ON status (only for initial status "ready to operate and
bypass")
✔ Set the staging signal p2369.
The converter takes back the control from K1.
The control and check-back signals change from K11 and K21 to K12 and K22
If the motors have different characteristics, a motor data set change-over must be
carried out.
✔ Set the command p1266 according to the status of motor 2.
✔ Reset the staging signal p2369.
The converter controls switch K12 or K22 depending on the status of motor 2.
✔ Only if motor 2 was in bypass: Release the lock of K22.
The converter now has control over motor 2 and can synchronize it to the line or
retrieve it from the line and continue to operate it (regulated) or stop it.
The following diagram clarifies the 4 possible transitions between 2 motors:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
266 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
0RWRU0RQWKHFRQYHUWHU 0RWRU0RQWKHFRQYHUWHU
0RWRU0QRE\SDVVPRGH 0RWRU0E\SDVVPRGH
67$*,1* 67$*,1*
0 0 0 0
0RWRU0E\SDVVPRGH 0RWRU0E\SDVVBPRGH
0RWRU0QRE\SDVVPRGH 0RWRU0E\SDVVPRGH
67$*,1* 67$*,1*
0 0 0 0
6.4.8.1 Description
This function supports options L51 "Output-side disconnector" and L52 "Output-side circuit
breaker".
The output-side disconnector increases the safety of staff, converter and motor, e.g. during
maintenance work. A disconnector or circuit breaker can also isolate the faulty system during
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 267
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
redundancy changeover. The switch used depends on the changeover time required or
whether there are higher isolation requirements.
Option L51 facilitates the "Safe torque off" function which frequently uses switching devices
between the converter and motor even in modern plant engineering systems. All safety
functions (e.g. disconnector off status message) are carried out using external modules (e.g.
protection-safety combinations). The drive only supports activation and deactivation of the
disconnector, which is coordinated by its own sequencer. The function described here
should therefore not be confused with the "Safe Torque Off" safety function of other
SINAMICS devices and for this reason is not relevant to certification.
Output-side circuit breaker L52 is, for example, not required in a permanent-magnet
synchronous motor (PEM). Unlike the disconnector, it also has the function of protecting the
converter. Unlike other types of motor, the PEM constantly discharges voltage if it is not
running. Feedback to the DC link, e.g. in case of a fault, can therefore only be prevented by
a switch between the converter and the motor. The same is true if the PEM is operating in
the field weakening range: with a pulse block field weakening is lost via the negative field-
generating current and the machine can discharge a terminal voltage which is far above the
rated voltage. This voltage may exceed the capacity of the converter and must therefore be
disconnected by a switch.
Dimensioning of the switch is project-dependent and must be appropriate for the application.
In particular, the circuit breaker must be dimensioned for the currents which may arise when
a fault occurs.
A disconnector can only switch very small currents. Therefore, it may be necessary to wait
until the current has fallen to almost zero before opening it. The main task is to disconnect
the electricity supply. Circuit breakers, on the other hand, can switch short-circuit currents.
The switch response occurs immediately on the switch command. The type of switch used
will depend on the option selected.
Overview
Both options L51 and L52 are realized separately and in principle may be selected together.
The diagram below gives an overview of the possible switches at the converter output
(together with option L29 "Bypass control").
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
268 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6XSSO\VLGH
FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
E\SDVV
3RZHU
VXSSO\
0RWRUVLGH
0RWRUVLGH 2XWJRLQJ )LOWHU< FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
FLUFXLWEUHDNHU LVRODWRU RU E\SDVV
UHDFWRU
,QYHUWHU 0RWRU
2SWLRQ/ 2SWLRQ/
2SWLRQ/
6ZLWFK
6ZLWFK
70PRGXOH
6ZLWFK
6ZLWFK
7KHIHHGEDFNVLJQDOVIURPWKHVZLWFKHVDUHPRQLWRUHGE\%L&RLQSXWV
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
,IRQHRIWKHVHVZLWFKHVLVQRWSUHVHQWWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJELWLQSPXVWEHVHWWRGHIDXOW
7KHVXSSO\VLGHFLUFXLWEUHDNHURIWKHPRWRULVXVHGWRFRQQHFWWKHPRWRUGLUHFWO\WRWKHSRZHUV\VWHPE\SDVV
7KHPRWRUVLGHFLUFXLWEUHDNHUE\SDVVPXVWZKHQVHHQIURPWKHFRQYHUWHUEHGRZQVWUHDPRIVZLWFKHVDQGWKHILOWHUUHDFWRU
Description
The switching conditions for disconnection depend on the motor sequencer. Explanations of
S1... S7 are given in function diagram 2610 (see List Manual).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 269
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
270 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 271
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Description
The switching conditions for disconnection depend on the motor sequencer. Explanations of
S1... S7 are given in function diagram 2610 (see List Manual).
Unlike the disconnector, in all safety cutouts with OFF2 in which the converter is also
disconnected from the power supply, the circuit breaker must also switch off.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
272 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.8.4 Startup
Description
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 273
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
✔ Activate the function for the VectorMV drive object via p0015 or the starter.
✔ Generate a user list in object VectorMV_03 with the parameters given below and carry
out the interconnections shown using object VectorMV_03 p10 = 2:
Note
The wiring connections shown in the diagram have been made according to function
diagrams 9800, 9801 and 9802. You will find the function diagrams in the List Manual on the
CD supplied with the converter.
The macros for options L51 and L52 merely preassign parameter settings, but have no effect
on the wiring connections.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
274 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Note
The parameterizations must be suitable for the disconnect switch.
Some parameters can only be changed when p9 = 3 is set in the object CU.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 275
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Figure 6-43 Interconnections from the point of view of the TM15 module
Parameter Description
p15 Macro drive object.
p6717 BI Motor switch / disconnector enable signal
p0643 Overvoltage protection for permanent-magnet synchronous motors.
r6660-6692 Switch parameters
r0046[21] Feedback switch
r0046[22] Feedback switch
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
276 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
NOTICE
If the terminal voltage of the PEM (permanent-magnet motor) is too high when the motor
switch is switched on, the converter switches off using OFF2 and crowbar firing. Surge
currents on powering up may cause damage to the converter.
A rotary encoder is essential for overvoltage protection of the PEM.
At setting p0643 = 0 operation is impossible without a rotary encoder or if the encoder is
faulty.
At setting p0643 = 1 operation is possible without a rotary encoder or if the encoder is
faulty.
Setting p0643 = 1 is only permissible if the dimensioning of the converter and motor and
the type of loading guarantee that the supply voltage generated by the PEM cannot exceed
the maximum permitted level.
A supply voltage which is higher than the permitted level may be produced under two
circumstances:
• The closed-loop control system is operating the PEM above the rated speed in the field
weakening range. If a pulse block occurs (during operation or after a fault), the PEM
generates a terminal voltage which is higher than the rated voltage
• The load itself can accelerate the idling motor over its rated speed
If one of these circumstances occurs, the overvoltage protection must not be switched off
with p0643 = 1. The motor must be operated with a rotary encoder.
Fit the system with a rotary encoder as described above if the dimensioning and
dynamometer cannot prevent these non-permissible terminal voltages from occurring in the
PEM.
Signaling
A missing enable signal for the motor switch/disconnector is indicated by alarm A07919.
If the switch is enabled, it switches on. The alarm is acknowledged.
Description
For heavy starting the switching frequency can be reduced to minimize losses when using
the motor inverter at low output frequencies.
The switching frequency is reduced linearly and incrementally for output frequencies below a
parameterizable threshold. The number of reduction steps can also be parameterized. The
factory setting is that switching frequency is not active initially (number of reduction steps
p6975 = 0, output frequency threshold p6976 = 0 Hz).
The frequency range below the frequency threshold p6976 is divided into ranges of equal
size. The number of ranges corresponds to the number of reduction steps p6975 (maximum
5). The user determines the initial reduction of switching frequency by choosing the number
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 277
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
of reduction steps. 5 reduction steps mean an initial reduction rate of 5 (switching frequency
reduced by 50%), 4 reduction steps an initial reduction rate of 4 (40%), etc.
If the output frequency increases, the switching frequency is reduced by less and less until
the rated switching frequency is reached on exceeding the threshold.
1XPEHURIUHGXFWLRQVWDJHV
'HJUHHRIUHGXFWLRQ
2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\>+]@
)UHTXHQF\WKUHVKROG
1XPEHURIUHGXFWLRQVWDJHV
'HJUHHRIUHGXFWLRQ
2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\>+]@
)UHTXHQF\WKUHVKROG
Figure 6-44 Example: Switching frequency reduction for two different numbers of reduction steps
The maximum parameterizable output frequency threshold depends on the set rated
switching frequency and is automatically limited when parameterization is unsuitable.
Irrespective of the parameterization, the switching frequency reduction remains restricted to
space vector approximation (SVA) mode, i.e. the switching frequency reduction has no effect
once it leaves the SVA range.
Fine adjustment factor p6961 is available except for incremental switching frequency
reduction. Thus the switching frequency in the entire SVA range can be multiplied by a fixed
factor between 0.8 and 1.2.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
278 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter Description
s
p6975 Number of reduction steps (max. 5)
p6976 Output frequency threshold (may be internally limited)
p6961 Fine adjustment factor
Description
The friction characteristic curve compensates for the friction torque of the motor and the
driven machine. A friction characteristic curve enables the speed controller to be pre-
controlled and improves the response.
10 interpolation points are used for each friction characteristic curve. The coordinates of an
interpolation point are described by a speed (p382x) and a torque parameter (p383x)
(interpolation point 1 = p3820 and p3830).
Characteristics
● 10 interpolation points are available for mapping the friction characteristic curve.
● An automatic function allows you to record the friction characteristic curve (record friction
characteristic curve).
● A connector output (r3841) can be applied as friction torque (p1569).
● The friction characteristic curve can be activated and deactivated (p3842).
Parameter Description
s
p3820 Friction characteristic curve value n0
... ...
p3839 friction characteristic curve value M9
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 279
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter Description
s
r3840 CO/BO: Friction characteristic curve status
r3841 CO: Friction characteristic curve output
p3842 Activate friction characteristic curve
p3845 Activate friction characteristic plot
DANGER
The motor can run at up to the maximum speed. This may result in death, serious injury,
or material damage.
When the friction characteristic curve is plotted, the drive can cause the motor to move.
As a result, the motor may reach maximum speed.
Ensure that the EMERGENCY STOP functions are fully operational during
commissioning. Observe the appropriate safety regulations.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
280 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
Description
The error message "Motor blocked" is only triggered if the speed of the drive is below the
variable speed threshold set in p2175. For vector control the speed controller must also be at
the limit.
Once the ON delay (p2177) has elapsed, the message "Motor blocked" and fault F7900 are
generated.
USP
S
QBDFW QBDFWS
U
Sุ!9HFWRUFRQWUROV
S!9IFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RQWUROPRGH
S
6SHHGFRQWUROOHUDWOLPLW
U
ุ 0RWRUORFNHG
U
)
&XUUHQWOLPLWUHDFKHG
U
S
V
21GHOD\
Parameters Description
p2175 Speed threshold motor blocked
p2177 Delay time motor blocked
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 281
Start
Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
Description
The main task of motor protection is to identify critical situations. If alarm thresholds are
exceeded, the user can set parameterizable response options (p0610) that enable continued
operation (e.g. with reduced power) and prevent immediate shutdown.
● 12t motor monitoring can be activated without a temperature sensor. This does not
reduce power.
● Values measured by motor temperature sensors can be obtained and monitored by
connecting and evaluating temperature modules by means of terminal modules.
Automatic power reduction can take place based on these actual values.
I2t monitoring
The functionality is activated using parameter p6550. The alarm and fault thresholds can be
entered in parameters p0605 and p0604. Parameter p0606 is used to enter a time stage
which also triggers a fault if the alarm threshold is continuously exceeded.
For 12t monitoring, the thermal time constant of the motor p6653 must be 1/4 of the time
required by the motor to reach 98% of its rated temperature at rated voltage, rated current,
rated frequency and ambient temperature. Additionally, in a self-cooled motor (p0335 = 0)
the cooling time constant when stationary p6654 that is entered must be 1/4 of the time
required by the motor to cool from rated temperature to ambient temperature.
Furthermore, for self-cooled machines, a capacity utilization characteristic curve for
operation at less than rated speed must be entered using parameters p6555, p6556 and
p6557.
Power reduction
This functionality enables thermal monitoring of two motor temperature sensors. These are
imported via a terminal module and connected to connectors p0603.0 and p0603.1. A
characteristic curve for temperature-dependent power reduction to 75% can be established
using parameters p0616 and p0618 together with p0617 and p0619. The reduction output
value is connected to power limiting p1555; an alarm or fault is triggered when the thresholds
are reached.
Parameters Description
Power reduction parameters
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
282 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
Parameters Description
r0035 Motor temperature, temperature sensor 1
p0603 Motor temperature source
p0610 Response to motor overtemperature condition
p0616 Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 1
p0617 Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 2
p0618 Motor overtemperature fault threshold 1
p0619 Motor overtemperature fault threshold 2
Parameters for 12t monitoring
r0034 Motor load
r0066 Output frequency
r0068 Absolute current actual value
p0305 Rated motor current
p0335 Motor cooling type
p0604 12t fault threshold
p0605 12t alarm threshold
p0606 12t time stage
p6550 Activate 12t motor monitoring
p6651 Activate 12t alarm output
p6652 Activate 12t fault output
p6653 12t motor monitoring thermal time constant
p6654 12t motor monitoring cooling time constant, self-cooling
p6655 12t motor monitoring capacity utilization characteristic curve f = 0.0 self-cooling
p6656 12t motor monitoring capacity utilization characteristic curve f = 0.5 self-cooling
p6657 12t motor monitoring capacity utilization characteristic curve f = 1.0 self-cooling
Description
This function is an extension of the "circuit breaker actuation" feature.
The software includes two counters per circuit breaker which record circuit breaker switching
operations under load and without load. The two counter readings are added and compared
with a freely parameterizable threshold (p6710), then an alarm is generated (F7322).
Two thresholds (p6710 and p6711) and therefore two alarms (F7322 and F7323) are
provided. The first alarm warns the user that the service life of the circuit breaker is nearing a
critical range. The second alarm indicates that the critical range has been reached.
No fault is displayed when the second threshold is exceeded because it is sufficient to
display the parameters in the experts list. The parameter values are saved in the PSA after
every change to the counter readings.
There are three different converter and circuit breaker combinations:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 283
Start
Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
Condition
1 2 3
GM 150 New New Used
Circuit breaker New Used New
Condition description
Conditio Description
n
1 The counters are in the zero position and the appropriate counter increments after each
switching operation.
2 For the used circuit breaker, the number of switching cycles with and without load must be
estimated and entered in the appropriate parameters (p6710, p6711).
This also applies if the converter PSA is changed.
The counter positions must be read from the "old" PSA and transferred to the "new" one.
3 The counter for the new circuit breaker must be returned to zero. Access level 3 is
required to do this.
The setting parameters (p6710, p6711) are available from access level 3, whereas the
visualization parameters may be accessed from level 1.
An available line side switch may be used in retrofit systems. Three parameters are therefore
provided for modifying counter readings.
● The first parameter (p6714) contains the number of load-free switching cycles.
● The second (p6715) contains the number of switching cycles under load.
● The third parameter is used to transfer these two values.
Transfer of these parameter values is only permitted at access level 3.
Counter conditions
Whether switching should take place with or without load depends on the type of
disconnection.
● Operational disconnection (OFF1 and OFF3) counts as switching without load.
● Fault shutdown (OFF2 response) counts as switching under load.
A factor can be set using p6712 to take account of the higher loading on the circuit breaker
when switching under load. This factor affects the reading on the "switching cycles under
load" counter.
Startup
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
284 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Parameter Description
s
p6710 Lower circuit breaker switching alarm threshold
p6711 Upper circuit breaker switching alarm threshold
p6712 Switch weighting factor for switching cycles under load
p6713 Circuit breaker switching cycles, total
p67141) Circuit breaker switching cycles, without current
p67151) Circuit breaker switching cycles under load
1) May only be changed at access level 3
Signaling
Description
Redundancy mode can be used to enable operation to continue despite failure of a Control
Unit (CU320).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 285
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
3 3
GM 150 -1 GM 150 -2
$/6 $/6
&LUFXLW &LUFXLW
7UDQVI 7UDQVI EUHDNHU
3 EUHDNHU 6 6
*5 :5 :5 *5
3
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
3XOOZLUH
&% 3UHFKDUJH PSA 1 PSA 2 3UHFKDUJH &%
FRQWURO FRQWURO
36$ 36$
)DQZDWHU +%2Q +%2Q )DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\ FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU GRRU
I/O I/O
X100 X100
C U 32 0-1
C U 32 0-2
X101 X101
,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO ,QW:
GRRUUHOHDVH TM 31 TM 31 6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH
PB
3/&
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
286 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Characteristics
● Redundancy for up to 2 Control Units (GM150, CU320)
● Redundancy mode may be selected using parameter (p7004)
● Redundancy mode may be selected via binector input (p7006)
● The active DRIVE-CLIQ ports are readable via r109
Prerequisites
● Functionality available with order number 6SL3835-2LN43-6AR00.
● Maximum 2 Control Units.
● Minimum firmware release 2.5.
● PLC and configuration required.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 287
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
0DVWHU 6ODYH
3 3
GM 150 -1 GM 150 -2
$/6 $/6
&LUFXLW &LUFXLW
7UDQVI 7UDQVI EUHDNHU
3 EUHDNHU 6 6
*5 :5 :5 *5
3
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
3XOOZLUH
&% 3UHFKDUJH PSA 1 PSA 2 3UHFKDUJH &%
FRQWURO FRQWURO
36$ 36$
)DQZDWHU +%2Q +%2Q )DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\ FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU GRRU
I/O I/O
X100 X100
C U 32 0-1
C U 32 0-2
X101 X101
,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO ,QW:
GRRUUHOHDVH TM 31 TM 31 6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH
PB
3/&
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
288 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
'ULYH 'ULYH
3 3
GM 150 -1 GM 150 -2
$/6 $/6
&LUFXLW &LUFXLW
7UDQVI 7UDQVI EUHDNHU
3 EUHDNHU 6 6
*5 :5 :5 *5
3
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
3XOOZLUH
&% 3UHFKDUJH PSA 1 PSA 2 3UHFKDUJH &%
FRQWURO FRQWURO
36$ 36$
)DQZDWHU +%2Q +%2Q )DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\ FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU GRRU
I/O I/O
X100 X100
C U 32 0-1
C U 32 0-2
X101 X101
5.(/('
X102 X102 5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'& SXVKEXWWRQ
TM 15 TM 15 '&
,62 X103 X103
:DUQ)DXOW ,62
TM 15 L 52 L 52 TM 15 :DUQ)DXOW
7HUPLQDO PB PB
TM 15 TM 15 7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH
LQWHUIDFH
,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO ,QW:
GRRUUHOHDVH TM 31 TM 31 6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH
PB
3/&
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 289
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Description
Redundancy mode can be used to enable operation to continue despite the failure of one
power unit connected in parallel. The DRIVE-CLiQ cables must be connected radially so that
the failed power unit can be replaced. It may be necessary to use a DRIVE-CLiQ HUB
Module (DMC20). The failed power unit must be deactivated via p0125 or via the binector
input p0895, before it is removed. When a replacement power unit has been installed it must
be activated accordingly.
Characteristics
● Redundancy for up to 3 power units.
● Power unit can be de-activated via parameter (p0125)
● Power unit can be de-activated via binector input (p0895).
Prerequisites
● Maximum number of parallel power units is 3.
● Minimum firmware release 2.5.
● Parallel connection of power units with suitable power reserves.
Description
Switching power units in parallel is a simple method of extending the power spectrum of
drives beyond the power of the individual power units.
Characteristics
The converter supports the parallel connection of power units on the motor side in order to
extend the power spectrum.
The main features of parallel circuits are:
● Parallel circuits with up to three power units on one motor with separate winding systems.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
290 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Startup
During commissioning, power units connected in parallel are treated like a power unit on the
motor side. With parallel connection, the parameter display for the actual values changes
only slightly. Instead, suitable "total values" are derived from the individual values for the
power units.
In STARTER, parallel connection of the motor module is activated via the Wizard. You can
also select parallel connection when choosing the power unit.
Parameters Description
p0120 Power unit data set (PDS) number
p0121 Power unit component number
r7000 Parallel circuit configuration, number of active power units
r7001 Parallel circuit configuration, enable power units
r7002 Parallel circuit configuration, power unit status
p7003 Parallel circuit configuration, winding system
p7010 Parallel circuit configuration, current asymmetry alarm threshold
p7011 Parallel circuit configuration, DC link voltage asymmetry alarm threshold
p7222-p7229 Actual current values
p7230-p7235 DC link voltage actual values
Description
The brake controller enables regenerative operation of an electric machine.
The following points should be noted when commissioning the brake controller:
● Check whether p6822.0 is nonzero. If so, enter the brake controller resistance (p6811)
and finish commissioning.
● Check that p6816 is connected to r0082.0
● Check that p6826 = 0.
● Check that p6814 is connected to p6813
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 291
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
● If Vdc max control is enabled for the machine (p1240 = 1) check that p6813 is at least 3
% smaller than p1241
● Test mode can be activated using p6650 = 30.
– An actuation signal (positive edge on p6651) starts pre-charging. On reaching the DC
link voltage setpoint, the brake controller synchronizes with the modulation ranges
specified in p6815.0 /.1. The falling partial DC link voltages (r0070.1 /.2) can be
recorded and checked using the starter trace.
Parameter Description
s
p6811 Brake controller brake resistance
p6812 Brake controller switching frequency
p6813 Brake controller voltage setpoint, fixed value
p6814 Brake controller voltage setpoint connector input (default: p6814 = p6813)
p6815 Brake controller modulation, test
p6816 Brake controller, pre-control power, connector input
p6817 Brake controller, proportional gain controller Kp
p6818 Brake controller, integral time controller Tn
p6819 Brake controller, DC link voltage actual value smoothing time
p6820 Brake controller, pre-control power smoothing time
p6821 Brake controller, connector input enable signals
r6822 Brake controller status word
r6823 Brake controller, modulation range display
p6824 Brake controller, power display
p6825 Brake controller, brake resistance temperature protection connector input
p6826 Brake controller, pre-control power difference, connector input
p6827 Brake controller, power unit temperature model connector output
Characteristics
● Control and monitoring functions of a recooling unit
● Automatically activated when using water-cooled power units
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
292 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Description
A recooling unit (RKA) is responsible for cooling and (non-) conductivity in the de-ionized
water cooling circuit of a water-cooled power unit. The unit is controlled and monitored by a
PLC which is part of the recooling unit. The "recooling unit" function module described here
forms an interface between the closed-loop control and the external control (open-loop)
(PLC) of the recooling unit. The recooling unit is controlled via terminals (e.g. Control Unit,
TM31).
Conductivity may be monitored via a sensor which provides an analog signal which is read
by the PSA (presetting) or by a sensor which provides two digital signals (conductivity alarm
threshold/fault threshold exceeded) which are read by the TM or CU via BICO connections.
When evaluating the analog value, the recooling unit function module constantly monitors
the conductivity of the de-ionized water. If the alarm threshold is exceeded, the module
automatically switches the recooling unit on and switches it off again when the level has
fallen below the alarm threshold by one hysteresis value.
The de-ionized water intake temperature is monitored constantly.
● If it falls below a fixed value of 5°C, the recooling unit switches on automatically to
prevent the water from freezing. It does not switch off until the temperature has risen
above a fixed value of 7°C.
● An OFF2 is generated if it exceeds the fault threshold 1 value (hardware description
data). However, the recooling unit does not switch off until the temperature has fallen
below the fault threshold by a fixed hysteresis value of 2K.
● If it exceeds the value for fault threshold 2 (fault threshold 1 + 2K), the recooling unit is
switched off immediately.
The intake temperature is also monitored at a maximum alarm threshold (p6299).
The fault triggered when evaluating a leakage can be re-parameterized into an alarm signal.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 293
294
Functions
Figure 6-49
65HDG\WRSRZHUXS 5.($FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
U U U
6:DLWIRU
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW
U U
S
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
5.(2Q 7 5.(1RIDXOW
U
U
5.(1ROHDNDJH
ุ
5.(6ZLWFKHGRQ U
U
5.(:DWHUIORZ2. U 5.(1RIDXOW
U
5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW U ุ
5.(2Q ุ 5.(1ROHDNDJH
5.$2Q U U
U
5.$1RIDXOW U
5.$1ROHDNDJH U
6:DLWIRU
6)DXOW
S U
5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW 7
U
S
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Parameters Description
r0046.07 Missing enable signals - recooling unit ready missing
p0260 Recooling unit ramp-up time 1
p0261 Recooling unit ramp-up time 2
p0262 Recooling unit fault conductivity delay time
p0263 Recooling unit fault water flow delay time
p0264 Recooling unit ramp-down time
r0265 BO: Recooling unit control word
p0266[0...7] BI: Recooling unit signal source feedback signals
r0267 BO: Recooling unit status word display
r0268 Recooling unit coolant conductivity actual value
p0269 Recooling unit coolant conductivity thresholds
p0270 Recooling unit conductivity status word
p6299 Power unit cooling input temperature alarm threshold
p6650 Activate test mode infeed
p6651 Activate/deactivate motor test mode signal source
Characteristics
● Fan control and monitoring functions
● Automatically activated when using air-cooled power units.
● Option of two fan classes: Main fan and redundant main fan.
● Optional evaluation of one motor protection switch per fan class (p6798, p6799).
● Optional evaluation of one speed monitoring system per fan class (p6798, p6799).
● Optional monitoring of pressure differential (presetting) with maximum of two pressure
differential sensors. (p6790, p6791, ...p6796, p6801).
● Operating hours counter for main fan and redundant main fan (p251, p252).
● Monitoring of intake air temperature using internal temperature sensors (p6299).
● Parameterizable ramp-down time (p6797).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 295
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
● Separate test mode for main fan and redundant main fan (p6650, p6651) without ramp-
down time.
Description
The fans are responsible for cooling an air-cooled power unit. They are actuated via
terminals (e.g. Control Unit, TM31). The fan control function module actuates the fans and
monitors the feedback signals.
The fan monitoring configuration uses a configuration word in the hardware description data
which can be read using the IBS tool (p6802).
The fans are normally monitored by one or two pressure differential sensors. The pressure
differential is monitored statically for fault and alarm thresholds and dynamically for changes
in pressure differential.
Slow changes in pressure differential are also monitored to provide advance warning of
pollution of the filter mats.
The actual differential pressure values are also monitored to detect wire breakage.
All threshold values are preset via hardware description data and may be adjusted via
Commissioning - Tools (Starter, Scout, OP) .
The fan motor protection switch and/or fan speed may also be monitored as an option. If
pressure differential monitoring is active, only one alarm is generated when these feedback
signals are missing. If there is no pressure differential monitoring, a fault is generated if fan
feedback signals are missing.
The redundant fan is automatically activated if a redundant fan is configured and the
pressure differential alarm threshold is not reached on starting the main fan, or the alarm
threshold is not reached during operation, or feedback signals from the fan speed monitoring
system or motor protection switches are missing. An alarm signal will be generated.
In order to guarantee availability, the redundant fan will be switched on for a set period at
regular intervals during operation of the main fan. The frequency of duration of operation are
specified in the hardware description data. No alarm signal is given during this cyclical
operation.
The intake temperature is also monitored at a maximum alarm threshold (p6299) and a fault
threshold (hardware description data).
Parameters Description
p0251 Power unit main fan operating hours counter
p0252 Power unit main fan maximum service life
p6299 Power unit cooling input temperature alarm threshold
p6650 Activate test mode infeed
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
296 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Parameters Description
p6651 Activate/deactivate motor test mode signal source
p6790 Main fan nominal pressure differential threshold
p6791 Main fan minimum pressure differential threshold
p6792 Main fan minimum pressure differential change on switching
p6793 Main fan minimum pressure differential change on fan failure
p6794 Main fan monitoring time on switching
p6795 Main fan pressure differential actual value smoothing time
p6796 Main fan pressure differential tolerance
p6797 Main fan ramp-down time
p6798 Main fan status word signal source
p6799 Main fan status word display
p6800 Main fan control word
p6801 Main fan pressure differential actual value
p6802 Main fan configuration display
Description
The ancillary fans are responsible for cooling the control cabinet and for additional cooling of
the rectifier cabinet, the inverter cabinet and the braking controller cabinet.
The function module monitors the fans while they are running. As no hardware configuration
word is defined, unassigned binary feedback signals must be permanently set to high.
(X222.8, X222.5, X222.4 or X222.1 to 24V or PSA simulation mode).
Monitoring is activated
● by feedback from the fan contactor or
● by a report from the PSA that the high-speed grounding switch has been triggered.
When the fans are being monitored via the motor protection switch, the binary input for the
fan protection feedback must be set permanently high (X221.4 to24V or PSA simulation
mode).
Ancillary fans that are in test mode can be switched on and off from the function module via
the PSA.
Characteristics
● The ancillary fans are monitored irrespective of the type of cooling.
● The ancillary fans are switched on by the PT100 evaluator or the PSA if the high-speed
grounding switch has been triggered.
● Up to four fan speed or motor protection switch reports from the ancillary fan (control
cabinet, rectifier, inverter and brake chopper) are monitored via digital inputs on the PSA.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 297
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
● One digital input on the PSA is monitored for overheating fault reports from the PT100
evaluator.
● One digital input on the PSA is for fan contactor feedback from the PT100 evaluator to
activate fan speed monitoring.
● A function test can be performed on the ancillary fans by doing a test run.
Function diagrams
None
Parameter Description
s
p6650 Activation test mode power supply
p6651 Signal source for switching motor test mode on/off
Description
A function module is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated during
commissioning.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
298 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
Parameter Description
s
r0107 Drive object type
p0108 Drive object, function module
p0124 Identifying the main components using LEDs
6.7.2.1 Description/Commissioning
Description
The technology controller is designed as a PID controller,
● whereby the differentiator can be switched to the control deviation channel or the actual
value channel (factory setting).
The P, I, and D components can be set separately. A value of 0 deactivates the
corresponding component.
Setpoints can be specified via two connector inputs. The setpoints can be scaled via
parameters (p2255 and p2256). A ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel can be
used to set the setpoint ramp-up/ramp-down time via parameters p2257 and p2258. The
setpoint and actual value channel each have a smoothing element. The smoothing time
can be set via parameters p2261 and p2265.
● The setpoints can be specified via separate fixed setpoints (p2201 to p2215), the
motorized potentiometer, or via the field bus (e.g. PROFIBUS).
● Pre-control can be integrated via a connector input.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 299
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
● The output can be scaled via parameter p2295 and the control direction reversed. It can
be limited via parameters p2291 and p2292 and interconnected as required via a
connector output (r2294).
● The actual value can be integrated, for example, via an analog input on the TB30.
If a PID controller has to be used for control reasons, the D component is switched to the
setpoint/actual value difference (p2263 = 1) unlike in the factory setting. This is always
necessary when the D component is to be effective, even if the reference variable changes.
The D component can only be activated when p2274 > 0.
Characteristics
Simple control functions can be implemented with the technology controller, e.g.:
● Level control
● Temperature control
● Dancer position control
● Pressure control
● Flow control
● Simple closed-loop control without higher-level controller
● Tension control
The technology controller features:
● Two scalable setpoints
● Scalable output signal
● Separate fixed values
● Separate motorized potentiometer
● The output limits can be activated and deactivated via the ramp-function generator.
● The D component can be switched to the control deviation or actual value channel.
● The motorized potentiometer of the technology controller is only active when the drive
pulses are enabled.
6.7.2.2 Examples
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
300 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
This is carried out by means of a variable-speed pump in conjunction with a sensor for
measuring the level.
The level is determined via an analog input (e.g. AI0 on TB30) and sent to the technology
controller. The level setpoint is defined in a fixed setpoint. The resulting controlled variable is
used as the setpoint for the speed controller.
6HQVRU
; DFW
7HFBUHJ.S 7HFBUHJ7Q
S S
5DPSIXQFWLRQ
;6HW JHQHUDWRU
QBVHW
7HFBUHJ S
6HWSRLQW
S 7HFBUHJW\SH
S
;$FW G
GW
$FWXDOYDOXH
S
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 301
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
Parameters Description
Fixed setpoints
p2201[0..n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1
... ...
p2215[0..n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 15
p2220[0..n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0
p2221[0..n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1
p2222[0..n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2
p2223[0..n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3
Motorized potentiometer
p2230[0..n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration
p2235[0..n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, raise setpoint
p2236[0..n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, lower setpoint
p2237[0..n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value
p2238[0..n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value
p2240[0..n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value
r2245 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint before RFG
p2247[0..n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time
p2248[0..n] Technology controller motor potentiometer ramp-down time
r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG
Closed-loop control
p2200 BI: Technology controller enable
p2253[0..n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1
p2254 [0..n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
302 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
Parameters Description
p2255 Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling
p2256 Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling
p2257 Technology controller ramp-up time
p2258 Technology controller ramp-down time
p2261 Technology controller setpoint filter time constant
p2263 Technology controller type
p2264[0..n] CI: Technology controller actual value
p2265 Technology controller actual value filter time constant
p2280 Technology controller proportional amplification
p2285 Technology controller integral action time
p2289[0..n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal
p2295 Technology controller output scaling
6.7.3.1 Characteristics/Commissioning
Characteristics
When the extension is activate, the monitoring functions are extended as follows:
● Speed setpoint monitoring: |n_setp| ≤ p2161
● Speed setpoint monitoring: n_set > 0
● Load monitoring
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 303
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
7RUTXH>1P@ S
S
S
S
7RUTXH
S DFWXDOYDOXH
S
S
6SHHG
S S S USP
U
$
%LW W
S S
Commissioning
The extended monitoring functions are activated while the commissioning Wizard is running.
Parameter r0108.17 indicates whether it has been activated.
6.7.3.2 Integration
Description
The extended monitoring functions are integrated in the system as follows.
Parameter Description
s
Load monitoring
p2181[D] Load monitoring, response
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
304 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
Parameter Description
s
p2182[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 1
p2183[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 2
p2184[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 3
p2185[D] Load torque monitoring torque threshold 1 top
... ...
p2190[D] Load torque monitoring torque threshold 3 bottom
p2192[D] Load monitoring, delay time
Speed setpoint monitoring
p2150[D] Hysteresis speed 3
p2151[C] CI: Speed setpoint
p2161[D] Speed threshold 3
r2198.4 BO: ZSW monitoring 2, |n_setp| ≤ p2161
r2198.5 BO: ZSW monitoring 2, n_setp < 0
6.8.1 Description
Every Powerstack has eight 12-bit D/A converters on it that represent the input range 0x000
to 0xFFF as 0 to 10 V. The outputs can be tapped at terminals X231 and X232:
● Output 0: X231.15 to ground X231.16
● Output 1: X231.14 to ground X231.13
● Output 2: X231.11 to ground X231.12
● Output 3: X231.10 to ground X231.9
● Output 4: X232.15 to ground X232.16
● Output 5: X232.14 to ground X232.13
● Output 6: X232.11 to ground X232.12
● Output 7: X232.10 to ground X232.9
The variables can be recorded with ordinary commercial analog recorder. Since the analog
outputs are recorded in the 500µs grid, the recorder should have a scanning frequency of at
least 2kHz. Otherwise scanning errors may occur.
Selection of signals
The sources of the signals should be set in parameters p6840[PDS] to p6847 [PDS] (access
level 3). The starter suggests a suitable selection list for each input. The 0% and 100%
values can also be set to calibrate the recorder. This allows the recorder offset and scaling to
be checked.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 305
Start
Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
If the converter has a number of power stacks, parameters p6840 to p6847 are declared.
Each additional powerstack thus provides 8 new analog outputs.
Checking the signals:
The instantaneous values of the signals that have been set can be checked in parameters
p6880[PDS] to p6887[PDS].
8>9@
6FDOLQJIDFWRU
6LJQDOYDOXH
2IIVHW
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
306 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
6.8.2 Integration
Description
The extended diagnostic functions are integrated in the system as follows.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 307
Start
Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
Parameters Description
p6840[PDS] to p6847[PDS] Input signals 0-7
p6850[PDS] to p6857[PDS] AND mask for word/short/byte signals 0-7
p6860[PDS] to p6867[PDS] Scaling factor for signals 0-7
p6870[PDS] to p6877[PDS] Offset for signals 0-7
p6880[PDS] to p6887[PDS] Instantaneous value for signals 0-7
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
308 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 309
Start
Insulation monitoring
The insulation monitor IRDH275-635 (Bender) has an external reset input. This input is
interconnected in such a way that the error messages are automatically acknowledged at the
insulation monitoring device.
If the converter ground is removed, the insulation resistance changes from short circuit to the
system-specific setpoint.
The error message is acknowledged.
7.4 Diagnostics
7.4.1 Introduction
Description
This section describes procedures for identifying the causes of problems and the measures
you need to take to rectify them.
Note
If errors or malfunctions occur in the cabinet unit, you must carefully check the possible
causes and take the necessary steps to rectify them. If you cannot identify the cause of the
problem or you discover that components are defective, your regional office or sales office
should contact Siemens Service and describe the problem in more detail.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
310 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 311
Start
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
312 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 313
Start
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
314 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 315
Start
Overview
The cabinet device has a number of protective functions that protect the converter from
damage in the event of a fault (faults and alarms).
What is a fault?
A fault is a message from the converter indicating an error or other exceptional (unwanted)
status. This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered, for
example, from the winding temperature monitor for the asynchronous motor. The faults are
displayed and can be reported to a higher-level control system via PROFIBUS. In the factory
default setting, the message "converter fault" is also sent to a relay output. Once you have
rectified the cause of the fault, you have to acknowledge the fault message.
What is an alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the converter. It does not result in
the converter being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged. Alarms are "self
acknowledging", that is, they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been
eliminated.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
316 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix A
A.1 Troubleshooting/FAQs
Description
This chapter is intended to contain troubleshooting tips and FAQs and will be revised in each
new version of the document.
Summary
Abbreviation Description
AC AC voltage
AO Analog Output
IM Induction Motor
BI Binector Input
BO Binector Output
CDS Command Data Set
CF card CompactFlash card
CI Connector Input
CU Control Unit
CO Connector Output
DC DC voltage
DOxx Digital Output
DO Drive Object
ESD Electrostatically Sensitive Devices
FBD Function Block Diagram
Hz Hertz
CB Circuit-Breaker
FOC Fiber Optic Cable
M Motor
MLFB Machine-readable product designation
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 317
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Abbreviation Description
PG Programming device
PSA Power Stack Adapter
RAM Random Access Memory
ROM Read Only Memory
STW Control word
TM Terminal Module
VDC link DC link voltage
VSM Voltage Sensing Module
Description
Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and
internal control variables.
BICO technology (Binector Connector Technology) allows the drive to be adapted to a wide
variety of conditions.
Digital and analog signals, which can be connected freely by means of BICO parameters,
are identified by the prefix BI, BO, CI or CO in their parameter name. These parameters are
identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams.
Note
The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO
technology.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
318 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 319
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Note
Nomenclature of Terminal Modules TM15/TM31
The Terminal Modules are identified (e.g., TM31_1) according to their arrangement in the
topology.
Note
Nomenclature of item codes
Item codes are distinguished by means of count variables according to their topology in the
relevant device.
For standardization of the item codes, the following applies: [=nHC-A11] where n = 1, 2, 3, 4,
etc.
Note
Nomenclature of the digital inputs and outputs (DI/DO)
The numbers of the digital inputs and outputs (DI/DO) correspond to the numbers in the
expert list.
A.3.3 Overview of standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
320 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Overview
Table A-4 Standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001501 on VECTORMV
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
608 CI: B_INF 4105 CO: TM31_1 X522.7 (+)
[0] Trafo temperature MV TM31 Temperature X522.8 (-)
signal source evaluation, actual [=.nHC-A51]
(Trafotemp S_src) value
Note: (TM31 Temp actual)
Temperature
evaluation is
disabled in the
default setting. If a
temperature sensor
is connected, then
evaluation must be
enabled on TM31_1
via p4100.
728 CU: CU_GM =0xffff*
Set input or output
(CU DI or DO)
[DI/DO 8] X122.7/
Set as output [=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 9] X122.8/
Set as output [=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 10] X122.10/
Set as output [=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 11] X122.11/
Set as output [=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 12] X132.7
Set as output [=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 13] X132.8
Set as output [=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 14] X132.10
Set as output [=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 15] X132.11
Set as output [=.nHA-A11]
738 BI: CU_GM X122.7 6660.0 CO/BO: B_INFMV
CU signal source for [=.nHA-A11] Switch 0 control
terminal DI/DO 8 signals
(CU S_src DI/DO 8) (Swtch 0 ctrl sig) ["On"
command]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 321
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
739 BI: CU_GM X122.8 6660.1 CO/BO: B_INFMV
CU signal source for [=.nHA-A11] Switch 0 control
terminal DI/DO 9 signals
(CU S_src DI/DO 9) (Swch 0 ctrl sig) ["Off"
command]
740 BI: CU_GM X122.10 6660.2 CO/BO: B_INFMV
CU signal source for [=.nHA-A11] Switch 0 control
terminal DI/DO 10 signals
(CU S_src DI/DO 10) (Swch 0 ctrl sig)
["Undervoltage coil off"
command]
741 BI: CU_GM X122.11 6571.0 BO: B_INFMV
CU signal source for [=.nHA-A11] Precharging control
terminal DI/DO 11 word
(CU S_src DI/DO 11) (Precharging STW)
[Precharging On
command]
743 BI: CU_GM X132.8 6660.3 CO/BO: B_INFMV
CU signal source for [=.nHA-A11] Switch 0 control
terminal DI/DO 13 signals
(CU S_src DI/DO 13) (Swch 0 ctrl sig)
["Higher-level switch
off" command]
810 BI: VECTOR 4022.11 CO/BO: TM15_2 X521.5
Command data set MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A31]
selection CDS bit 0 input status
(select CDS bit 0) (TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 11]
840 BI: B_INF r0863.1 CO/BO: Drive coupling VECTOR
[0 to 3] ON/OFF1 MV status/control word MV
CDS (ON/OFF1) (Coupl ZSW/ STW)
[Control infeed]
845 BI: B_INF 899.4 CO/BO: Status word VECTOR
[0 to 3] 2. OFF2 MV sequencer infeed MV
CDS (2. OFF2) (ZSW Seq INF)
[No active coast down]
845 BI: VECTOR 722.6 CO/BO: CU_GM X132.3
[0 to 3] 2. OFF2 MV CU digital input status [=.nHA-A11]
CDS (2. OFF2) (CU DI Status)
[DI 6]
864[0] BI: VECTOR 863.0 CO/BO: Drive coupling B_INFMV
Infeed operation MV status/control word
(INF operation) (Coupl ZSW/ STW)
[Infeed operation]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
322 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
876[0] BI: B_INFM 899.13 CO/BO: Status word VECTOR
External switching V sequencer MV
on inhibited signal (ZSW sequencer) [Test
source mode active]
(Ext inhibit S_src)
877[0] External switching B_INFM =1*
on inhibited V
inversion
(Ext inhibit Inv)
876[0] BI: VECTOR 899.13 CO/BO: Status word B_INFMV
External switching MV sequencer infeed
on inhibited signal (ZSW Seq INF)
source [Test mode active]
(Ext inhibit S_src)
877[0] External switching VECTOR =1*
on inhibited MV
inversion/Ext inhibit
Inv
876[1] BI: VECTOR 899.6 CO/BO: Status word B_INFMV
External switching MV sequencer infeed
on inhibited signal (ZSW Seq INF)
source [Switching on inhibited]
(Ext inhibit S_src)
877[1] External switching VECTOR =1*
on inhibited MV
inversion/Ext inhibit
Inv
1208 BI: Automatic restart VECTOR 6530.0 CO/BO: B_INFMV
[0] control word MV Line status
(AR STW) (Line status)
[line voltage present]
4028 TM15DI/DO Set TM15_1 =0x11F0
input or output 3*
(TM15D DI or DO)
[DI/DO 0] X520.2
Set as output [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 1] X520.3
Set as output [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 2] X520.4
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 3] X520.5
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 4] X520.6
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 323
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
[DI/DO 5] X520.7
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 6] X520.8
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 7] X520.9
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 8] X521.2
Set as output [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 9] X521.3
Set as output [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 10] X521.4
Set as output [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 11] X521.5
Set as output [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 12] X521.6
Set as output [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 13] X521.7
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 14] X521.8
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 15] X521.9
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 16] X522.2
Set as output [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 17] X522.3
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 18] X522.4
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 19] X522.5
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 20] X522.6
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 21] X522.7
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 22] X522.8
Set as input [=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 23] X522.9
Set as input [=n.HC-A11]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
324 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
4030 BI: TM31_1 4023.18 CO/BO: TM15DI/DO TM15_1 X522.4
TM31 Signal source Digital inputs inverted [=.nHC-A11]
for terminal DO 0 status
(TM31 S_src DO 0) (TM15D DI Stat inv)
Explanation: [DI/DO 18]
Enable command Explanation:
from the sequencer Ground fault
to enable the door monitoring fault check-
magnets back signal
BI: Low COM 0
(X542.2) +
NC 0
(X542.1)
[=.nHC-A51]
BI: High COM 0
(X542.2) +
NO 0
(X542.3)
[=.nHC-A51]
4031 BI: TM31_1 1214.2 CO/BO: Automatic VECTOR
TM31 signal source restart status MV
for terminal DO 1 (AR status)
(TM31 S_src DO)1 [Automatic restart
BI: Low COM 1 active]
(X542.5) +
NC 1
(X542.4)
[=.nHC-A51]
BI: High COM 1
(X542.5) with
NO 1
(X542.6)
[=.nHC-A51]
4071 CI: TM31_1 [0] = AO 0 63[1] CO: Actual speed VECTOR
[0] TM31 analog (X522.1, value MV
outputs signal X522.2, (N_Act)
source X522.3)
(TM31 AO [=.nHC-A51]
Sig_source)
4100 TM31 Temperature TM31 X522.7(+) =2*
evaluation, sensor X522.8(-)
type [=.nHC-A51]
(TM31 Temp
Sens_typ)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 325
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
6531 BI: B_INF 1214.9 CO/BO: Automatic VECTOR
Precharging two- MV restart status MV
point control (AR status)
activation
(Prech_Twopoint
Act)
6500 BI: B_INF 4023.7 CO/BO: TM31_1 X530.4
[44] External digital MV TM31 Digital input [=.nHC-A51]
messages, signal status inverted
source (TM31 DI Status inv)
(Ext dig Mess S_src) [DI/DO 7]
Explanation:
Error, overvoltage
protection 1 AC
230 V
6576 BI: Motor cabinet VECTOR 722.6 CO/BO: CU digital CU_GM X132.3
[0] status MV inputs Status/CU DI [=.nHA-A11]
word/Mot_cabinet Status
ZSW [DI 6]
6576 BI: Motor cabinet VECTOR 722.7 CO/BO: CU_GM X132.4
[1] status word MV CU digital input status [=.nHA-A11]
(Mot_cabinet ZSW) (CU DI Status)
[DI 7]
6670 BI: Switch simulation B_INF =0* Simulation mode for
[0] mode MV the switch is disabled
(Swch Sim_mode)
6577 Infeed cabinet/motor B_INF 4022.19 CO/BO: TM15DI/DO TM15_1 X522.5
[0] cabinet, "Safe On" MV Digital input status [=.nHC-A11]
status word check- (TM15D DI Status)
back signal [DI/DO 19]
(Manual + Motor)
6577 Infeed cabinet/motor B_INFM 4022.20 CO/BO: TM15DI/DO TM15_1 X522.6
[1] cabinet, "Safe Off" V Digital input status [=.nHC-A11]
status word check- (TM15D DI Status)
back signal [DI/DO 20]
(Manual + Motor)
6577 Infeed cabinet/motor B_INF 4022.18 CO/BO: TM15DI/DO TM15_1 X522.4
[2] cabinet, Ground fault MV Digital input status [=.nHC-A11]
monitoring fault (TM15D DI Status)
status word check- [DI/DO 18]
back signal
6577 Infeed cabinet/motor B_INF 4022.17 CO/BO: TM15DI/DO TM15_1 X522.3
[3] cabinet, Ground fault MV Digital input status [=.nHC-A11]
monitoring alarm (TM15D DI Status)
status word check- [DI/DO 18]
back signal
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
326 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
6577 Infeed cabinet/motor B_INF 4022.0 CO/BO: TM31_1 X520.1
[4] cabinet, Voltage MV TM31 Digital input [=.nHC-A51]
monitoring infeed 1 status
AC status word (TM31 DI Status)
check-back signal [DI/DO 0]
6577 Infeed cabinet/motor B_INF 4022.1 CO/BO: TM31_1 X520.2
[5] cabinet, Voltage MV TM31 Digital input [=.nHC-A51]
monitoring 24 VDC status
status word check- (TM31 DI Status)
back signal [DI/DO 1]
6684 BI: B_INF 722.0 CO/BO: CU_GM X122.1
[0] Switch check-back MV CU digital input status [=.nHA-A11]
signal ready (CU DI Status)
(Swch CB ready) [DI 0]
6685 BI: B_INF 722.2 CO/BO: CU_GM X122.3
[0] Switch check-back MV CU digital input status [=.nHA-A11]
signal On (CU DI Status)
(Swch CB on) [DI 2]
6686 BI: B_INF 722.1 CO/BO: CU_GM X122.2
[0] Switch check-back MV CU digital input status [=.nHA-A11]
signal off (CU DI Status)
(Swch CB off) [DI 1]
6687 BI: B_INF 722.4 CO/BO: CU_GM X132.1
[0] Switch check-back MV CU digital input status [=.nHA-A11]
signal auxiliary (CU DI Status)
voltage 1 OK [DI 4]
(Swch CB U_Aux1)
6688 BI: B_INF 722.5 CO/BO: CU_GM X132.2
[0] Switch check-back MV CU digital input status [=.nHA-A11]
signal auxiliary (CU DI Status)
voltage 2 OK [DI 5]
(Swch CB U_Aux2)
6689 BI: B_INF 722.3 CO/BO: CU_GM X122.4
[0] Switch check-back MV CU digital inputs, [=.nHA-A11]
signal external status
switch-off (CU DI status)
(Sch RM Ext Swch- [DI 3]
off)
6816 CI: B_INF 82[0] CO: Active power VECTOR
Braking controller MV actual value MV
precontrol capability (P_act)
(P_Precontrol) [Unsmoothed]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 327
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
6825 BI: B_INF 4023.7 CO/BO: TM15_1 X520.9
[0] Braking controller MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
braking resistor input status inverted
temperature (TM15D DI Status inv)
protection [DI/DO 7]
(R_Brake Protect)
[Overtemperature
alarm]
6825 BI: B_INF 4023.21 CO/BO: TM15_1 X522.7
[1] Braking controller MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
braking resistor input status inverted
temperature (TM15D DI Status inv)
protection [DI/DO 21]
(R_Brake Protect)
[Overtemperature
fault]
A.3.4 Overview of standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
328 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Overview
Table A-5 Standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on VECTORMV
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
675 CI: VECTOR 37.3 CO: VECTOR
[0,...3] Motor supply air MV Power unit MV
CDS temperature signal temperatures
source (PU temperatures)
(Mot [Supply air]
SupplyAirTemp
S_src)
Overview
Table A-6 Standard cabling for the parameter macro PM001540 on B_INFMV
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
6798 B_INFMV 4022.2 CO/BO: TM15_1 X520.4
[0] TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 2]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 329
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
6798 B_INFMV 4022.3 CO/BO: TM15_1 X520.5
[1] TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 3]
6798 B_INFMV 4022.4 CO/BO: TM15_1 X520.6
[2] TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
6798 B_INFMV 4022.5 CO/BO: TM15_1 X520.7
[3] TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 5]
742 BI: CU_GM X132.7 6800.0 BO: B_INFMV
CU, signal source [=.nHA-A11] Main fan control word
for terminal DI/DO (Main fan STW)
12 [Redundant main fan
(CU S_src DI/DO on]
12)
744 BI: CU_GM X132.10 6800.1 BO: B_INFMV
CU signal source [=.nHA-A11] Main fan control word
for terminal (Main fan STW)
DI/DO 14 [Redundant main fan
(CU S_src DI/DO on]
14)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
330 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.6 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001555 for option G66
Overview
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
6844 CI: VECTOR 70[1] CO: B_INFMV
[0] PSA Analog output MV DC link voltages actual
PDS 4 signal source values
(PSA AO 4 S_src) (Vdc_act)
[Positive partial DC link
voltage]
6845 CI: VECTOR 70[2] CO: B_INFMV
[0] PSA Analog output MV DC link voltages actual
PDS 5 signal source values
(PSA AO 5 S_src) (Vdc_act)
[Negative partial DC
link voltage]
6846 CI: VECTOR 76 CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Current actual value, MV
PDS 6 signal source field-generating
(PSA AO 6 S_src) (Id_Act)
6847 CI: VECTOR 78 CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Current actual value, MV
PDS 7 signal source torque-generating
(PSA AO 7 S_src) (Iq_Act)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 331
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.7 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001557 Analog O PSA
for options K21 and K20
Overview
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
840 BI: VECTOR 4022.14 CO/BO: TM15_1 X521.8
[0 to 3] ON/OFF1 MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
CDS (ON/OFF1) input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
852 BI: VECTOR 4022.14 CO/BO: TM15_1 X521.8
[0 to 3] Enable operation MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
CDS (Enable operation) input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
2103 BI: VECTOR 4022.4 CO/BO: TM15_2 X520.6
[0 to 3] 1. Acknowledge MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
CDS faults input status
(1. Acknowledge) (TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
2103 BI: B_INFMV 4022.4 CO/BO: TM15_2 X520.6
[0 to 3] 1. Acknowledge TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
CDS faults input status
(1. Acknowledge) (TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
4038 BI: TM15_1 X521.2 899.3 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
source for terminal (ZSW sequencer)
DI/DO 8 [Fault present]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 8)
[DI/DO 8]
4039 BI: TM15_1 X521.3 899.7 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
source for terminal (ZSW sequencer)
DI/DO 9 [Alarm present]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 9)
[DI/DO 9]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
332 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
4040 BI: TM15_1 X521.4 899.2 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
source for terminal (ZSW sequencer)
DI/DO 10 [Operation enabled]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 10)
[DI/DO 10]
4041 BI: TM15_1 X521.5 899.0 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
source for terminal (ZSW sequencer)
DI/DO 11 [Ready to switch on]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 11)
[DI/DO 11]
4042 BI: TM15_1 X521.6 807.0 BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Master control active MV
source for terminal (PcCtrl active)
DI/DO 12 [Master control active]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 12)
[DI/DO 12]
6840 CI: VECTOR 25 CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Output voltage MV
PDS 0 signal source smoothed
(PSA AO 0 S_src) (U_Out smooth)
6841 CI: VECTOR 27 CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Current actual value, MV
PDS 1 signal source absolute value
(PSA AO 1 S_src) smoothed
(I_Act abslt val smooth)
6842 CI: VECTOR 21 CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Actual speed value MV
PDS 2 signal source smoothed
(PSA AO 2 S_src) (N_Act smooth)
6843 CI: VECTOR 32 CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Active power actual MV
PDS 3 signal source value smoothed
(PSA AO 3 S_src) (P_Active_actual_smoo
th)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 333
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.8 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001558 Analog O PSA
for options K22 and K20
Overview
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
840 BI: VECTOR 4022.14 CO/BO: TM15_1 X521.8
[0 to 3] ON/OFF1 MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
CDS (ON/OFF1) input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
852 BI: VECTOR 4022.14 CO/BO: TM15_1 X521.8
[0 to 3] Enable operation MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
CDS (Enable operation) input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
2103 BI: VECTOR 4022.4 CO/BO: TM15_2 X520.6
[0 to 3] 1. Acknowledge MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A31]
CDS faults input status
(1. Acknowledge) (TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
2103 BI: B_INFMV 4022.4 CO/BO: TM15_2 X520.6
[0,...3] 1. Acknowledge TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A31]
CDS faults input status
(1. Acknowledge) (TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
4038 BI: TM15_1 X521.2 899.3 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
source for terminal (ZSW sequencer)[Fault
DI/DO 8 present]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 8)
[DI/DO 8]
4039 BI: TM15_1 X521.3 899.7 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
source for terminal (ZSW sequencer)
DI/DO 9 [Alarm present]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 9)
[DI/DO 9]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
334 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
4040 BI: TM15_1 X521.4 899.2 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
source for terminal (ZSW sequencer)
DI/DO 10 [Operation enabled]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 10)
[DI/DO 10]
4041 BI: TM15_1 X521.5 899.0 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
source for terminal (ZSW sequencer)
DI/DO 11 [Ready to switch on]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 11)
[DI/DO 11]
4042 BI: TM15_1 X521.6 807.0 BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO Signal [=.nHC-A11] Master control active MV
source for terminal (PcCtrl active)
DI/DO 12 [Master control active]
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 12)
[DI/DO 12]
6840 CI: VECTOR 35[0] CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Motor temperature MV
PDS 0 signal source (Motor temperature)
(PSA AO 0 S_src) [Temperature sensor 1]
6841 CI: VECTOR 27 CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Current actual value, MV
PDS 1 signal source absolute value
(PSA AO 1 S_src) smoothed
(I_Act abslt val smooth)
6842 CI: VECTOR 21 CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Actual speed value MV
PDS 2 signal source smoothed
(PSA AO 2 S_src) (N_Act smooth)
6843 CI: VECTOR 32 CO: VECTOR
[0] PSA Analog output MV Active power actual MV
PDS 3 signal source value smoothed
(PSA AO 3 S_src) (P_Active_actual_smoo
th)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 335
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.9 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001571 for Emergency
Button 1 option
Overview
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter [item code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter name) [signal name]
[signal name]
845 BI: VECTOR 1 Bit 1 = 1:
[0,...3] 2. OFF2 MV No OFF2 (enable is
CDS (2. OFF2) possible)
849 BI: VECTOR 722.6 CO/BO: CU_GM X132.3
[0,...3] 2. OFF3 MV CU digital input status [=.nHA-A11]
CDS (2. OFF3) (CU DI Status)
[DI 6]
A.3.10 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001580 Lamps and
StartStop Button
Overview
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal [item Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter [signal name]
name)
[signal name]
840 BI: VECTOR 4022.14 CO/BO: TM15_1 X521.8
[0,...3] ON/OFF1 MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
CDS (ON/OFF1) input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
336 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal [item Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter [signal name]
name)
[signal name]
852 BI: VECTOR 4022.14 CO/BO: TM15_1 X521.8
[0,...3] Enable MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
CDS operation input status
(Enable (TM15D DI Status)
operation) [DI/DO 14]
2103 BI: VECTOR 4022.4 CO/BO: TM15_2 X520.6
[0,...3] 1. Acknowledge MV TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A31]
CDS faults input status
(1. (TM15D DI Status)
Acknowledge) [DI/DO 4]
2103 BI: B_INFMV 4022.4 CO/BO: TM15_2 X520.6
[0,...3] 1. Acknowledge TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A31]
CDS faults input status
(1. (TM15D DI Status)
Acknowledge) [DI/DO 4]
4038 BI: TM15_1 X521.2 899.3 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
Signal source (ZSW sequencer)[Fault
for terminal present]
DI/DO 8
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 8)
[DI/DO 8]
4039 BI: TM15_1 X521.3 899.7 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
Signal source (ZSW sequencer)
for terminal [Alarm present]
DI/DO 9
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 9)
[DI/DO 9]
4040 BI: TM15_1 X521.4 899.2 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
Signal source (ZSW sequencer)
for terminal [Operation enabled]
DI/DO 10
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 10)
[DI/DO 10]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 337
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal [item Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter [signal name]
name)
[signal name]
4041 BI: TM15_1 X521.5 899.0 CO/BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO [=.nHC-A11] Status word sequencer MV
Signal source (ZSW sequencer)
for terminal [Ready to switch on]
DI/DO 11
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 11)
[DI/DO 11]
4042 BI: TM15_1 X521.6 807.0 BO: VECTOR
TM15DI/DO [=.nHC-A11] Master control active MV
Signal source (PcCtrl active)
for terminal [Master control active]
DI/DO 12
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 12)
[DI/DO 12]
A.3.11 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001582 for option L27-
L29 Bypass1
Overview
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal [item Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter [signal name]
name)
[signal name]
1268 BI: VECTOR 3819.2 CO/BO: VECTOR
Bypass check- MV Sync line drive status MV
back signal word
synchronization (Sync ZSW)
complete [Sync line drive
(Check-back synchronization
sync done) achieved]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
338 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal [item Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter [signal name]
name)
[signal name]
3802 BI: VECTOR 1261.2 CO/BO: VECTOR
[0,...3] Sync line drive MV Bypass control/status MV
CDS enable word
(Sync enable) (Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Synchronization
requested]
6670 BI: VECTOR 1261.9 CO/BO: VECTOR
[1] Switch, MV Bypass control/status MV
simulation mode word
(Swch (Bypass STW/ZSW)
Sim_mode) [Staging requested (by
[[1] = Switch 1] p2369)]
6670 BI: VECTOR 1261.9 CO/BO: VECTOR
[2] Switch, MV Bypass control/status MV
simulation mode word
(Swch (Bypass STW/ZSW)
Sim_mode) [Staging requested (by
[[2] = Switch 2] p2369)]
6671 BI: VECTOR 1261.1 CO/BO: VECTOR
[1] Switch on/off MV Bypass control/status MV
(Swch on/off) word
[[1] = Switch 1] (Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Motor line
switch command]
6671 BI: VECTOR 1261.1 CO/BO: VECTOR
[2] Switch on/off MV Bypass control/status MV
(Swch on/off) word
[[2] = Switch 2] (Bypass STW/ZSW)
6675 Monitoring time VECTOR =1*
[1] switch-off switch MV
(Swch Off
t_Monitor)
[[1] = switch 1]
6675 Monitoring time VECTOR =1*
[2] switch-off switch MV
(Swch Off
t_Monitor)
[[2] = switch 2]
6676 Maximum VECTOR =1*
[1] switch-off time MV
switch
(Swch t_Off
max)
[[1] = switch 1]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 339
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal [item Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter [signal name]
name)
[signal name]
6676 Maximum VECTOR =1*
[2] switch-off time MV
switch
(Swch t_Off
max)
[[2] = switch 2]
6677 Switch-on VECTOR =0* 0: Continuous signal
[1] command signal MV
type switch
(Swch On Signal
type)
[[1] = switch 1]
6677 Switch-on VECTOR =0* 0: Continuous signal
[2] command signal MV
type switch
(Swch On Signal
type)
[[2] = switch 2]
6678 Switch-off VECTOR =0* 0: Continuous signal
[1] command signal MV
type switch
(Swch Off Signal
type)
6678 Switch-off VECTOR =1* 1: Pulse signal
[2] command signal MV
type switch
(Swch Off Signal
type)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
340 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.12 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001583 for option L53
UPS
Summary
Sink Source
Para- BICO: Parameter DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter name (long) [item code] meter Parameter name [item code]
(Parameter name (long)
[value] / [value]
data (short)) [signal (Parameter name
name] (short)) [signal
block name]
6500[24]] BI: B_INFMV 4022.2 CO/BO: TM31_1 X520.3
External digital TM31 Digital inputs [=.nHC-
messages, signal status A11]
source (TM31 DI Status)
(Ext dig Msg S_q) [DI 2]
[A49024]
6500[25]] BI: B_INFMV 4022.3 CO/BO: TM31_1 X520.4
External digital TM31 Digital inputs [=.nHC-
messages, signal status A11]
source (TM31 DI Status)
(Ext dig Msg S_q) [DI 3]
[A49025]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 341
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.13 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001584 for option L55
Standstill Heating
Overview
Sink Source
Para- BICO: DO Terminal [item Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter Long parameter code] meter Long parameter name [item code]
[value] name [value] (short
(short parameter name)
parameter [signal name]
name)
[signal name]
6500 BI: B_INFMV 4023.13 CO/BO: TM15_1 X521.7
[26] External digital TM15DI/DO Digital [=.nHC-A11]
messages, input status inverted
signal source (TM15D DI Status inv)
(Ext dig Msg [DI/DO 13]
S_src)
[A49026]
A.3.14 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001585 for options
N20, N21 Capacitor Tripping device Circuit Breaker
Overview
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
342 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.15 Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001587 for option
Motor temperature sensors
Overview
Sink Source
Para- BICO: Parameter DO Terminal Para- BICO: DO Terminal
meter name (long) [item code] meter Parameter name [item code]
(Parameter name (long)
[value] / [value]
data (short)) [signal (Parameter name
name] (short)) [signal
block name]
603[0] CI: VECTOR 4055[0] CO: TM31_2 X521.1
Motor MV TM31 analog inputs, X521.2,
temperature actual value in S5.0)
signal source percent [=.nHD-
(Mot Temp S_q) (TM31 AI value in A31]
[Temperature %)
sensor 1] [[0] = AI 0]
[1] = Temperature
sensor 2
603[1] CI: VECTOR 4055[1] CO: TM31_2 X521.3
Motor MV TM31 analog inputs, X521.4,
temperature actual value in S5.1)
signal source percent [=.nHD-
(Mot Temp S_q) (TM31 AI value in A31]
[Temperature %)
sensor 2] [[1] = AI 1]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 343
Start
Start
Glossary
Access level
The drive is protected from unauthorized access using the access levels. The parameters
are divided into different access levels. The access level first needs to be set in order to
display and change a parameter using the BOP.
Adjustable parameters
These parameters are write/read parameters.
Alarm
An alarm is the response to a potential or expected fault condition detected by the drive that
does not cause the drive to switch off and does not have to be acknowledged. The alarm
mechanism is specified in the PROFIdrive profile. The drive sends a pending alarm to the
control system via a bit in the status word.
Analog input
Terminal to which an external analog voltage signal (e.g. -10 V to +10 V) or a current signal
(e.g. 0 to 20 mA) can be connected. An A/D converter forms an internal software signal from
this signal. The analog inputs may be provided by the TMxx terminal modules, for example.
Analog output
Terminal at which an analog voltage signal (e.g. -10 V to +10 V) or a current signal (e.g. 0 to
20 mA) is output. The signal is formed by converting an internal software signal using an A/D
converter. The analog outputs may be provided by the TMxx terminal modules, for example.
Automatic restart
After a power failure, the automatic restart function automatically restarts a converter when
the supply voltage recovers. It does not require acknowledgement of the power failure fault.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 345
Start
Glossary
BICO technology
The BICO technology method is used for freely interconnecting process data via "standard"
drive parameterization.
BOP
A simple, small operator panel with a numeric display and a few keys that can be plugged in
to the control unit.
CompactFlash card
Memory card for non-volatile storage of the drive software and associated parameters. The
memory card can be plugged into the Control Unit from outside.
Control Unit
Central control module in which the closed-loop and open-loop control functions for one or
more SINAMICS Line Modules and/or Motor Modules are implemented.
Data set
Parameters can be grouped together in a data set. This allows a range of use cases to be
implemented by parameterizing and switching between the data sets. The individual data
sets are entered as "indexed parameters". Switchover is carried out using input signals.
DC link
The component of the converter (or converter system) that connects the input current
converter (rectifier) and the output current converter (one or more inverters).
With voltage source DC link inverters such as SINAMICS devices, a constant DC voltage is
present in the DC link (rectified supply voltage).
DC link voltage
Voltage in a frequency converter's DC link.
Digital input
Input terminal for a +24 V control signal.
Digital output
Output terminal for a +24 V control signal or a relay output.
Direction of rotation
When looking at the front of the outgoing motor shaft, the following applies:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
346 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Glossary
Drive object(DO)
A drive object is a self-contained software function with its own parameters and, if
necessary, its own faults and alarms. Drive objects can be provided as standard (e.g. on-
board I/O), or can be added individually or multiply (e.g. servo control). As a rule, each drive
object has its own STARTER window for parameterization and diagnostic purposes.
Encoder
An encoder is a measuring system that captures actual values for the speed and/or angular
or relative positions and makes them available for electronic processing. Depending on their
mechanical design, encoders can be built into the motor (motor encoder) or mounted on the
external mechanics (external encoder). Depending on the type of motion, a distinction is
made between rotary encoders (sometimes called "shaft encoders") and translatory
encoders (e.g., linear position encoders). In terms of measured value provision, a distinction
is made between "absolute encoders" (code encoders) and -> "incremental encoders". See -
> "Incremental encoder TTL/HTL" -> "Incremental encoder sin/cos 1Vpp" -> "Resolver".
Incremental position and speed encoder. Unlike the absolute encoder, this encoder does not
output an actual position value signal corresponding to the absolute position, but instead
outputs incremental "delta position or angular signals". There are three types of incremental
encoders: the incremental encoder TTL/HTL, the incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, and the
resolver.
Incremental position and speed encoder (incremental encoder), which usually produces two
pulse trains (tracks) offset at 90 degrees with square-wave output signals and generally also
one zero pulse per revolution. The output signals have TTL levels (in most cases +5 V
RS422 differential signals; TTL = Transistor-Transistor Logic) or HTL levels (+15 or +24 V
logic level; HTL = High Level Transistor Logic).
A high-resolution optical sine/cosine encoder that can be installed in 1FK6 motors as a motor
encoder, for example.
The following signals are normally output:
● Two signals offset by 90 degrees, each with 2,048 sinusoidal signal periods per
revolution as differential signals with an amplitude of 1 Vpp (A/B sinusoidal encoder
tracks).
● A reference signal (zero pulse) per revolution as a differential signal with an amplitude of
0.5 Vpp.
● With certain types, two additional sinusoidal signal periods offset by 90 degrees as
differential signals with an amplitude of 1 Vpp (C/D track).
To determine the actual position/angular value, the zero crossings of the sinusoidal encoder
tracks are evaluated first (rough evaluation, e.g., in total 4 x 2,048 = 8,192 zero crossings
per revolution). In addition, a fine evaluation can be performed with analog amplitude
detection. Through a combination of rough and fine evaluations, resolutions of more than
1,000,000 increments per encoder revolution can be achieved. Typical sin/cos encoders
include, for example: ERN1387 and ERN1381.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 347
Start
Glossary
Resolver
Extremely mechanically and electrically robust and cost-efficient motor encoder that does not
require any integrated electronics and operates purely according to the electromagnetic
principle: One sine and one cosine signal are induced in each of the two coils offset by 90
degrees. The resolver supplies all of the signals required for speed-controlled operation of
the converter or for position control. The number of sine and cosine periods supplied per
revolution is equal to the number of pole pairs of the resolver. On a two-pole resolver, the
evaluation electronics can output an additional zero pulse for each encoder revolution, which
enables unique assignment of the position information with respect to an encoder revolution.
A two-pole resolver can be used as a single-turn encoder. Two-pole resolvers are suitable
for motors with any number of poles. With multi-pole resolvers, the pole pair numbers of the
motor and the resolver are always identical, which means that multi-pole resolvers ensure a
higher resolution than two-pole resolvers.
Fault
An unintended status that is identified and displayed by the drive controller or can be sent to
a higher-level controller. A fault normally causes the drive to shut down. In certain cases an
alternative reaction can be configured using the appropriate parameter. Faults must always
be acknowledged and the correct procedure for clearing them is specified by PROFIdrive.
Firmware
Firmware is the software saved on a CompactFlash card that is required for operating a
SINAMICS drive.
Firmware version
The version of the software for the control unit saved on the CompactFlash card. The
firmware versions of the individual components are displayed using different parameters.
Flying restart
Following power-up, the flying restart function automatically switches a converter into any
motor connected downstream. When switching into a running motor the motor first needs to
be remagnetized by an induction motor. With drives not equipped with an encoder, a search
for the current speed is also carried out. The current speed setpoint in the ramp-function
generator is then set to the current actual speed value. The ramp-up to the final speed
setpoint starts with this value. The flying restart function can help to shorten the ramp-up
procedure following power-up (if the load is still running down). Application example: After a
power failure, a fan drive can be quickly reconnected to the running fan impeller by means of
the flying restart function.
LOCAL mode
In LOCAL mode the user control unit (for example an AOP30) has master control over the
drive.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
348 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Glossary
Master control
Master control is usually assigned to a higher-level controller (e.g. PROFIBUS master). To
operate a drive using the STARTER commissioning tool, master control will occasionally
have to be assigned to the PC, after which master control is returned to the higher-level
controller.
Motor
For the electric motors that can be driven, a basic distinction is made between rotary and
linear motors with regard to their direction of motion, and between synchronous and
asynchronous motors with regard to their electromagnetic operating principle. The motors
are connected to motor modules.
Motor Module
A motor module is a power unit (DC-AC inverter) that provides the power supply for the
motor(s) connected to it. Power is supplied via the DC link on the drive unit. A motor module
must be connected to a control unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. The open-loop and closed-loop control
functions for the motor module are stored in the control unit.
Output frequency
Frequency of the sinusoidal output voltage from a converter.
Parameter
Variable used on the drive system that the user can read and, in some cases, write. A
parameter meets the drive specifications contained in the PROFIdrive profile.
Pre-charging
Charging the DC link capacitors using resistors. Pre-charging is normally performed from the
feeding supply network, but can also be performed from a pre-charged DC link (DC
coupling).
PROFIBUS
Field bus standardized in accordance with IEC 61158, Sections 2 to 6.
PROFIBUS stands for Process Field Bus. PROFIBUS is a multi-vendor standard for the
networking of field devices (e.g., PLC, drives, actuators, or sensors).
PROFIdrive
PROFIBUS profile specified for speed and position-controlled drives by the PROFIBUS User
Organization (German: PNO). The latest version is the PROFIdrive V3 profile.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 349
Start
Glossary
Project wizard
The project wizard provides assistance when creating a project by guiding users through the
configuration settings step-by-step.
REMOTE mode
In REMOTE mode a higher-level controller (for example a customer terminal strip or a
PROFIBUS master) has master control over the drive.
Servo control
This type of closed-loop control enables operation with a high dynamic response and
precision for a motor with a motor encoder. In addition to speed control, position control can
be implemented.
Setpoint channel
The setpoint for closed-loop control (e.g. closed-loop speed control) is conditioned in the
setpoint channel. The setpoints can be set either using
● PROFIBUS
● fixed setpoints or
● a motorized potentiometer
The setpoint can be varied by a ramp-function generator, a filter or additional
feedforwarding, for example.
Short-circuiting device
A device which protects the system from dangerous voltages by providing a high contact
closing speed.
STARTER
STARTER is used to commission and parameterize drive units. This tool can also be used to
execute the diagnostic functions required when servicing the system (e.g. PROFIBUS
diagnostics, function generator, trace).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
350 Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Glossary
Terminal Module
Terminal expansion module that snaps onto the installation rail, for installation in the control
cabinet.
Topology
The topology describes the structure of a drive system consisting of a control unit, motor
modules, motors, encoders and terminal modules, including the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring and
other wiring.
Trace
Cyclic saving of internal process signals of the drive for diagnostic purposes or capturing
process data.
Vector control
Vector control (field-oriented control) is a high-performance control method for induction
machines. It is based on an exact model calculation of the motor and two current
components that simulate and accurately control the flux and torque by means of software
algorithms, thereby enabling predefined speeds and torques to be observed and limited
accurately and with a good dynamic response.
Two types of vector control exist:
● frequency control (encoderless vector control), and
● speed-torque control with speed feedback (encoder).
Visualization parameters
These read-only parameters are used to display important internal software signals.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 351
Start
Start
Index
A M
Access levels, 187 Main/supplementary setpoint, 223
Motorized potentiometer, 221
C
P
Changing over units, 197
Current setpoint filter Parameter
Vector, 244 Categories, 185
Types, 185
Pre-control
D speed, 235
PROFIBUS, 20
Data sets
PROFIBUS connection, 20
Command data set (CDS), 192
Drive data set (DDS), 193
Motor data set (MDS), 194
R
Ramp function generator, extended, 226
E Reference model, 235
ESD guidelines, 11
ESD protective measures, 12
S
Setpoint channel
F Direction of rotation limiting, 224
Direction reversal, 224
Five safety rules, 11
extended, 214
Fixed setpoints, 220
Fixed speed setpoints, 220
Fixed speed setpoints, 220
Jog, 216
Functions
Main/supplementary setpoint, 223
Fixed speed setpoints, 220
Motorized potentiometer, 221
Jog, 216
Ramp function generator, extended, 226
Motorized potentiometer, 221
Setpoint limitation, 225
Setpoint modification, 223
Suppression bandwidths, 225
J Setpoint modification, 223
Jog, 216 Setpoint sources, 215
JOG Speed controller, 231
Jog, 216 Reference model, 235
Speed controller adaptation, 233
Speed controller pre-control, 235
K STARTER
Starting the drive project, 38, 117
Kinetic buffering, 246
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 353
Start
Switchover
Start
Index
T
Torque control, 240
V
Vdc control
Vector n/m control, 246
Vdc_max control
Vector n/m control, 248
Vdc_min control
Vector n/m control, 247
Vector
Speed controller adaptation, 233
Torque control, 240
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K 355
Start